0% found this document useful (0 votes)

130 views

ZPL II Programming x.10 Thru x.13

ZPL Programming Manual for firmware versions x.10 thru x.13

Uploaded by

ccrowder5

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

130 views

ZPL II Programming x.10 Thru x.13

ZPL Programming Manual for firmware versions x.10 thru x.13

Uploaded by

ccrowder5

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 404

ZPL II Programming

Guide
For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

2006 ZIH Corp. The copyrights in this manual and the software and/or firmware in the label printer described therein are owned by ZIH Corp. Unauthorized reproduction of this manual or the software and/or firmware in the label printer may result in imprisonment of up to one year and fines of up to $10,000 (17 U.S.C.506). Copyright violators may be subject to civil liability. This product may contain ZPL, ZPL II, and ZebraLink programs; Element Energy Equalizer Circuit; E3; and Monotype Imaging fonts. Software ZIH Corp. All rights reserved worldwide. ZebraLink and all product names and numbers are trademarks, and Zebra, the Zebra logo, ZPL, ZPL II, Element Energy Equalizer Circuit, and E3 Circuit are registered trademarks of ZIH Corp. All rights reserved worldwide. All other brand names, product names, or trademarks belong to their respective holders. For additional trademark information, please see Trademarks on the product CD. Proprietary Statement This manual contains proprietary information of Zebra Technologies Corporation and its subsidiaries (Zebra Technologies). It is intended solely for the information and use of parties operating and maintaining the equipment described herein. Such proprietary information may not be used, reproduced, or disclosed to any other parties for any other purpose without the express, written permission of Zebra Technologies. Product Improvements Continuous improvement of products is a policy of Zebra Technologies. All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Liability Disclaimer Zebra Technologies takes steps to ensure that its published Engineering specifications and manuals are correct; however, errors do occur. Zebra Technologies reserves the right to correct any such errors and disclaims liability resulting therefrom. Limitation of Liability In no event shall Zebra Technologies or anyone else involved in the creation, production, or delivery of the accompanying product (including hardware and software) be liable for any damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, consequential damages including loss of business profits, business interruption, or loss of business information) arising out of the use of, the results of use of, or inability to use such product, even if Zebra Technologies has been advised of the possibility of such damages. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.

Part Number: 45541L-003 Rev. A

Contents

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii About This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

Who Should Use This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii How This Document Is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix Web Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix The Americas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix Europe, Africa, Middle East, and India . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix Asia Pacific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix Document Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xx

1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 ZPL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Basic ZPL Exercises and Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

^A Scalable/Bitmapped Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ^A@ Use Font Name to Call Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ^B0 Aztec Bar Code Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ^B1 Code 11 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ^B2 Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ^B3 Code 39 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ^B4 Code 49 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ^B5 Planet Code bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ^B7 PDF417 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ^B8 EAN-8 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ^B9 UPC-E Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6/9/06 ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

12 14 16 18 20 22 26 30 31 35 37

45541L-003 Rev. A

Contents

^BA ^BB ^BC ^BD ^BE ^BF ^BI ^BJ ^BK ^BL ^BM ^BO ^BP ^BQ ^BR ^BS ^BT ^BU ^BX ^BY ^BZ ^CC ^CD ^CF ^CI ^CM ^CO ^CT ^CV ^CW ~DB ~DE ^DF ~DG ~DN ~DS ~DT ~DU ~DY ~EG

Code 93 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 CODABLOCK Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Code 128 Bar Code (Subsets A, B, and C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 UPS MaxiCode Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 EAN-13 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Micro-PDF417 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Industrial 2 of 5 Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Standard 2 of 5 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 ANSI Codabar Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 LOGMARS Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 MSI Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Aztec Bar Code Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Plessey Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 QR Code Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 RSS (Reduced Space Symbology) Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 UPC/EAN Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 TLC39 bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 UPC-A Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Data Matrix Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Bar Code Field Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 POSTNET Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

~CC Change Carets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 ~CD Change Delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Change Alphanumeric Default Font Change Memory Letter Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Change International Font/Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Cache On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

~CT Change Tilde

Font Identifier

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Code Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Download Bitmap Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Download Encoding Download Format Download Graphics

Abort Download Graphic

Download Intellifont (Scalable Font) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Download Bounded TrueType Font Download Unbounded TrueType Font Erase Download Graphics

Download Graphics / Native TrueType or OpenType Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

6/9/06

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

Contents

^FB ^FC ^FD ^FH ^FM ^FN ^FO ^FP ^FR ^FS ^FT ^FV ^FW ^FX ^GB ^GC ^GD ^GE ^GF ^GS ~HB ~HD ^HF ^HG ^HH ~HI ~HM ~HS ~HU ^HV ^HW ^HY ^HZ ÎD ÎL ÎM ÎS ~JA ^JB ~JB
6/9/06

Field Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Field Clock (for Real-Time Clock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Field Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Field Hexadecimal Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Multiple Field Origin Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Field Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Field Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Field Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Field Reverse Print Field Typeset Field Variable

Field Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Field Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Graphic Box Graphic Circle Graphic Ellipse Graphic Field Graphic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Graphic Diagonal Line

Battery Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Head Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Host Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Host Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Configuration Label Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Host Identification Host RAM Status

Host Status Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Return ZebraNet Alert Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Host Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Host Directory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Upload Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Display Description Information Object Delete Image Load Image Move Image Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
45541L-003 Rev. A

Cancel All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Initialize Flash Memory Reset Optional Memory

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

Contents

~JC ~JD ~JE ~JF ~JG ^JJ ~JL ^JM ~JN ~JO ~JP ~JR ^JS ~JS ^JT ^JU ^JW ~JX ^JZ ~KB ^KD ^KL ^KN ^KP ^LH ^LL ^LR ^LS ^LT ^MC ^MD ^MF ^ML ^MM ^MN ^MP ^MT ^MU ^MW ~NC

Set Media Sensor Calibration Disable Diagnostics Set Battery Condition Set Auxiliary Port Set Label Length Head Test Fatal

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Enable Communications Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Graphing Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Set Dots per Millimeter Head Test Non-Fatal

Pause and Cancel Format

Power On Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Sensor Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Change Backfeed Sequence Head Test Interval Configuration Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Set Ribbon Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Cancel Current Partially Input Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Reprint After Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Kill Battery (Battery Discharge Mode) Define Language Define Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Select Date and Time Format (for Real Time Clock)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Define Printer Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Label Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Label Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Label Reverse Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Label Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Label Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Map Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Media Darkness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Media Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Maximum Label Length Print Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Media Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Mode Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Media Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Set Units of Measurement Network Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Modify Head Cold Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
6/9/06

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

Contents

vii

^NI ~NR ^NS ~NT ^PF ^PH ^PM ^PO ^PP ^PQ ^PR ~PR ~PS ^PW ~RO ^SC ~SD ^SE ^SF ^SL ^SN ^SO ^SP ^SQ ^SR ^SS ^ST ^SX ^SZ ~TA ^TO ~WC ^WD ^XA ^XB ^XF ^XG ^XZ ^ZZ

Network ID Number

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Set All Network Printers Transparent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Change Networking Settings Set Currently Connected Printer Transparent

Slew Given Number of Dot Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

~PH Slew to Home Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Printing Mirror Image of Label Print Orientation Print Quantity Print Rate Print Start Print Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

~PP Programmable Pause

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Contents

Notes ___________________________________________________________________

__

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

Functional Table of Contents

Abort Download Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 ANSI Codabar Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Applicator Reprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Aztec Bar Code Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Aztec Bar Code Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Bar Code Field Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Battery Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Cache On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Calibrate RFID Transponder Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Cancel All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Cancel Current Partially Input Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Change Alphanumeric Default Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Change Backfeed Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Change Carets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Change Delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Change International Font/Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Change Memory Letter Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Change Networking Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Change Tilde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Change Wired Networking Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Change Wireless Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 CODABLOCK Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Code 11 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Code 128 Bar Code (Subsets A, B, and C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Code 39 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Code 49 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Code 93 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Code Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
6/9/06 ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware 45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

xvi

Functional Table of Contents

Notes ___________________________________________________________________

__

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

About This Document

This section provides you with contact information, document structure and organization, and additional reference documents.

Contents
Who Should Use This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii How This Document Is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xx

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

xviii

About This Document Who Should Use This Document

Who Should Use This Document

This Guide is for programmers who are familiar working with programming languages.

How This Document Is Organized

The Guide is set up as follows:
Section Description

Introduction ZPL Commands RFID Commands

Provides a high-level overview about this guide and Zebra Programming Language (ZPL). Provides an alphabetical, detailed description of each ZPL command. Provides an alphabetical, detailed description of each ZPL RFID command, and some examples of how to use them. Provides new and modified ZPL commands for the wireless print server. The appendixes include: Zebra Code Pages ASCII Fonts and Bar Codes Mod 10 and Mod 43 Check Digits ZB64 Encoding and Compression Field Interactions

Wireless Print Server Commands Appendixes

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

About This Document Contacts

xix

Contacts
You can contact Zebra Technologies at the following:

Web Site
http://www.zebra.com Technical Support via the Internet is available 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. Go to http://www.zebra.com/support.

The Americas
Regional Headquarters Zebra Technologies International, LLC 333 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills, Illinois 60061.3109 U.S.A T: +1 847 793 2600 Toll-free +1 800 423 0422 F: +1 847 913 8766 Technical Support T: +1 847 913 2259 F: +1 847 913 2578 Hardware: [email protected] Software: [email protected] Customer Service Dept. For printers, parts, media, and ribbon, please call your distributor, or contact us. T: +1 866 230 9494 E: [email protected]

Europe, Africa, Middle East, and India

Regional Headquarters Zebra Technologies Europe Limited Zebra House The Valley Centre, Gordon Road High Wycombe Buckinghamshire HP13 6EQ, UK T: +44 (0)1494 472872 F: +44 (0) 1494 450103 Technical Support T: +44 (0) 1494 768298 F: +44 (0) 1494 768210 Germany: [email protected] France: [email protected] Spain/Portugal: [email protected] All other areas: [email protected] Internal Sales Dept. For printers, parts, media, and ribbon, please call your distributor, or contact us. T: +44 (0) 1494 768316 F: +44 (0) 1494 768244 E: [email protected]

Asia Pacific
Regional Headquarters Zebra Technologies Asia Pacific, LLC 16 New Industrial Road #05-03 Hudson TechnoCentre Singapore 536204 T: +65 6858 0722 F: +65 6885 0838 Technical Support T: +65 6858 0722 F: +65 6885 0838 E: [email protected] Customer Service For printers, parts, media, and ribbon, please call your distributor, or contact us. T: +65 6858 0722 F: +65 6885 0837

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

About This Document Document Conventions

Document Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this document to convey certain information. Alternate Color (online only) Cross-references contain hot links to other sections in this guide. If you are viewing this guide online in .pdf format, you can click the cross-reference (blue text) to jump directly to its location. Command Line Examples Command line examples appear in Courier New font. For example, type ZTools to get to the Post-Install scripts in the bin directory. Files and Directories File names and directories appear in Courier New font. For example, the Zebra<version number>.tar file and the /root directory. Icons Used
Important Advises you of information that is essential to complete a task.

Note Indicates neutral or positive information that emphasizes or supplements important

points of the main text.

Example Provides an example, often a scenario, to better clarify a section of text.

Illustration Callouts Callouts are used when an illustration contains information that needs to be labeled and described. A table that contains the labels and descriptions follows the graphic. Figure 1 provides an example. Figure 1 Sample Figure with Callouts
1 2

ZPL II CODE ^XA ^FO150,100^BY3 ^B4N,20,A,A ^FD12345ABCDE^FS ^XZ

CODE 49 BAR CODE

This section contains the complete alphabetical listing of ZPL II commands. Description This heading provides an explanation of how the command is used, what it is capable of, and any defining characteristics it has. Format Format explains how the command is syntactically arranged and what parameters it contains. For Example The ^B8 command prints a EAN-8 bar code. The format of the ^B8 command is: ^B8o,h,f,g. It is arranged with the caret symbol (^), the command code (B8), and the parameters and are replaced with supported values. Parameters If a command has values that can be defined to make its function more specific, these are outlined as parameters. Parameters typically have Accepted Values and Default Values. Still using the ^B8 example, the h parameter is defined as:

h = bar code height (in dots)

Accepted Values: 1 to 32000 Default Value: value set by ^BY If the command has no parameters for example ~JA (Cancel All) the parameter heading is removed, indicating that the format of the command (~JA) is acceptable ZPL II code.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands

Example When the command is best clarified in context, an example of the

ZPL II code is provided. Text indicating exact code entered is printed in an easily recognizable Courier font. An example of code using the ^B8 command looks like this: ^XA ^FO50,50 ^B8N,100,Y,N ^FD1234567^FS ^XZ Notice that the ^B8 parameter letters have been replaced with real values that apply to the command. In this example N,100,Y,N have been entered.

Comment This section is reserved for notes that are of value to a programmer, warnings of potential command interactions, or command-specific information that should be taken into consideration.
Example An example comment is: This command works only when the printer is idle,

or This command is ignored if a value exceeds the parameter limits. Comments are also included next to parameters if they apply directly to a particular setting.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands Basic ZPL Exercises and Examples

Basic ZPL Exercises and Examples

The purpose of these exercises is to introduce basic ZPL commands to novice ZPL users.

Make sure this checklist is complete:

Load the printer with labels that are big enough to give you ample space to work with. Print a configuration label (CANCEL test). Look at the configuration label and make sure that the LEFT POSITION is set to 000 and LABEL TOP is set to 000. Determine the printers resolution. It is listed on the configuration label. 8/MM = 200 dpi, 12/MM = 300 dpi and 24/MM = 600 dpi.
Tips

These are some tips when using ZPL: Use the DOS text editor to write ZPL files. Save the file as a .txt file and copy it to the printer from DOS command line.

Before you begin

Some things that are important to understand before you begin are: 200 dpi means the resolution of the printhead is 200 dots per inch. If you program the printer to draw a line 100 dots long that equals a half inch. 100 dots on a 300 dpi printer prints a line 1/3 inch long. The home position that all your coordinates are referencing is at the left-hand trailing edge of the label as the label comes out of the printer. (There are some exceptions to this.)

Exercises
The exercises start simple and gradually progress to give you an opportunity to try a variety of commonly used ZPL commands. Not all commands are covered, but this should be a good core of commands to learn. Some commands may not be supported due to the firmware version in your printer.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands Basic ZPL Exercises and Examples

Exercise 1 This exercise shows you how to specify a location for an entered name.
1. Print your name on the label. 2. Start by printing just your name on the label. Use this format as a model:

Important Your name goes where you see xxxxxxxxxxx in the second line of code.

3. Send this format to the printer:

1 2 3 4

^XA

^FO50,50^ADN,36,20^FDxxxxxxxxxxx ^FS
^XZ
5 1 2 3 4 5

Every format starts with the ^XA command ^FO (field origin) command ^FS (field separator) command Every format ends with the ^XZ command ^FD (field data) command

4. When the label prints correctly, alter the first number after the ^FOx. See how that

change affects the print position. Alter the second number after the ^FO50,x and see how that the print position.

Font instruction
^ADN
1. Alter the numbers after the ^ADN,x,x command.

18,10 is the smallest size you can make the D font. The first number is the height of the font in dots. The second number is the width in dots. You can use direct multiples up to ten times that size as a maximum.
Example 180,100 is the largest you can make the D font.

25,18 would not be a valid size. The printer rounds to the next recognizable size.

2. Check the font matrices tables for other fonts to try. See Fonts and Bar Codes

on page 349.
3. Try the zero scalable font ^A0N,x,x.

This font is scalable, and you can choose any height and width.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands Basic ZPL Exercises and Examples

Rotation commands
1. Change ÂDN to ÂDR, and then ÂDI, and then ÂDB.

See how the print position changes.

2. Add more fields. 3. Add two more fields to print directly under your name using the ^ADN,36,20 font and

size: Your street address Your city, state, zip

4. You must add two more lines of code that start off with:

^XA ^FO50,50^ADN,36,20^FDxxxxxxxxxxx^FS ^FO ^FO ^XZ Make sure all these fields print in the same font and size and left side of fields has same vertical alignment. Your name 1200 W Main Street Anytown, Il 60061 Exercise 2 Boxes and lines
1. Use the address format from Exercise 1. 2. Add this new line to your existing format:

(fill in the rest) (fill in the rest)

^FO50,200^GB200,200,2^FS This prints a box one wide by one inch long and the thickness of the line is 2 dots.
3. Reposition and resize the square so that it goes around the name and address uniformly. 4. Print a line by adding:

^FO50,300^GB400,0,4,^FS This prints a horizontal line two inches wide by 4 dots thick.
5. Print a vertical line using this code:

^F0100,50^GBO,400,4^FS

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands Basic ZPL Exercises and Examples

Exercise 3 Bar codes ^B3 code 39 bar code

1. Write the following format and send to the printer:

^XA ^FO50,50^B3N,N,100,Y,N^FD123456^FS ^XZ

2. Try changing each of the parameters in the ^B3 string so you can see the effects.

Important For valid parameter choices, see ^B3 on page 22.

^B3o,e,h,f,g ^BY
3. Insert the ^BY command just before the ^B3 to see how the narrow bar width can be

altered. ^FO50,50^BY2^B3..etc ^BYx, acceptable values for x are 1 through 10

4. Alter the ratio of the narrow to wide bar.

^FO50,50^BY2,3^B3..etc ^BY2,x acceptable values for x are 2.1 through 3 in .1 increments

5. Print out a ^B3 bar code with the interpretation line on top of the bar code and the bar

code rotated 90 degrees.

6. Add a ^PQ just before the ^XZ to print several labels.

^PQ4 ^XZ

^PR Print rate (in inches per second)

7. Add a ^PR command after the ^XA at the beginning of the format to change the print rate

(print speed). ^XA ^PR4 then try ^PR6 ^PRx acceptable values for x are 2 through 12 (check printer specs) See how the print speed affects the print quality of the bar code. You may need to increase the printer darkness setting at higher print speeds.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands Basic ZPL Exercises and Examples

Exercise 4 ^SN Serial Number command

^Af,o,h,w

Important Parameter f is required. If f is omitted it defaults to the last value of the ^CF

command. This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Command Details

f = font name

Accepted Values: A through Z, and 0 to 9 Any font in the printer (downloaded, EPROM, stored fonts, fonts A through Z and 0 to 9). Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: the last accepted ^FW value or the ^FW default Scalable Accepted Values: 10 to 32000 Default Value: last accepted ^CF Bitmapped Accepted Values: multiples of height from 1 to 10 times the standard height, in increments of 1 Default Value: last accepted ^CF Scalable Accepted Values: 10 to 32000 Default Value: last accepted ^CF Bitmapped Accepted Values: multiples of width from 1 to 10 times the standard width, in increments of 1 Default Value: last accepted ^CF

o = field orientation

h = Character Height (in dots)

w = width (in dots)

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^A

Scalable Font Command

Example This is an example of a scalable font command:

Bitmap Font Command

Example This is an example of a bitmap font command:

For reference, see Standard Printer Fonts on page 350, Zebra Code Page 850 on page 340, Fonts and Bar Codes on page 349, and ASCII on page 345. Comments Fonts are built using a matrix that defines standard height-to-width ratios. If you specify only the height or width value, the standard matrix for that font automatically determines the other value. If the value is not given or a 0 (zero) is entered, the height or width is determined by the standard font matrix.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^A@

Â@
Use Font Name to Call Font
Description The Â@ command uses the complete name of a font, rather than the character designation used in Â. Once a value for Â@ is defined, it represents that font until a new font name is specified by Â@. Format Â@o,h,w,d:o.x This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

o = field orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotates 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: N or the last ^FW value Default Value: specifies magnification by w (character width) or the last accepted ^CF value. Uses the base height if none is specified. Scalable The value is the height in dots of the entire character block. Magnification factors are unnecessary, because characters are scaled. Bitmapped The value is rounded to the nearest integer multiple of the fonts base height, then divided by the fonts base height to give a magnification nearest limit. Default Value: specifies magnification by h (height) or the last accepted ^CF value. Specifies the base width is used if none is specified. Scalable The value is the width in dots of the entire character block. Magnification factors are unnecessary, because characters are scaled. Bitmapped The value rounds to the nearest integer multiple of the fonts base width, then divided by the fonts base width to give a magnification nearest limit. Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: R:

h = character height (in dots)

w = width (in dots)

d = drive location of font

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^A@

Parameters

Details

o = font name

Accepted Values: any valid font Default Value: if an invalid or no name is entered, the default set by ^CF is used. If no font has been specified in ^CF, font A is used. The font named carries over on all subsequent ^A@ commands without a font name. Accepted Values: .FNT = font .TTF = TrueType Font

x = extension

Example This example is followed by a table that identifies the called out lines of code: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Starts the label format. Searches non-volatile printer memory (B:) for CYRI_UB.FNT. When the font is found, the ^A@ command sets the print orientation to normal and the character size to 50 dots by 50 dots. Sets the field origin at 100,100. Prints the field data, Zebra Printer Fonts on the label. Calls the font again and character size is decreased to 40 dots by 40 dots. Sets the new field origin at 100,150. Prints the field data, This uses the B:CYRI_UB.FNT on the label. Ends the label format.

For reference, see Zebra Code Page 850 on page 340, Fonts and Bar Codes on page 349, and ASCII on page 345.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^B0

^B0
Aztec Bar Code Parameters
Description The ^B0 command creates a two-dimensional matrix symbology made up of square modules arranged around a bulls-eye pattern at the center.
Note The Aztec bar code works with firmware V60.13.0.11A and higher.

Format ^B0a,b,c,d,e,f,g This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: 1 to 10 Default Value: 1 on 150 dpi printers 2 on 200 dpi printers 3 on 300 dpi printers 6 on 600 dpi printers Accepted Values: Y = if data contains ECICs N = if data does not contain ECICs Default Value: N Accepted Values: 0 = default error correction level 01 to 99 = error correction percentage (minimum) 101 to 104 = 1 to 4-layer compact symbol 201 to 232 = 1 to 32-layer full-range symbol 300 = a simple Aztec Rune Default Value: 0 Accepted Values: Y = if this symbol is to be a menu (bar code reader initialization) symbol N = if it is not a menu symbol Default Value: N

b = magnification factor

c = extended channel interpretation code indicator

d = error control and symbol size/type indicator

e = menu symbol indicator

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^B0

Parameters

Details

f = number of symbols for structured append g = optional ID field for structured append

Accepted Values: 1 through 26 Default Value: 1

The ID field is a text string with 24-character maximum Default Value: no ID

Example This is an example of the ^B0 command:

ZPL II CODE
^XA ^B0R,7,N,0,N,1,0 ^FD 7. This is testing label 7^FS ^XZ

GENERATED LABEL

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^B1

^B1
Code 11 Bar Code
Description The ^B1 command produces the Code 11 bar code, also known as USD-8 code. In a Code 11 bar code, each character is composed of three bars and two spaces, and the character set includes 10 digits and the hyphen (-). ^B1 supports print ratios of 2.0:1 to 3.0:1. Field data (^FD) is limited to the width (or length, if rotated) of the label. Format ^B1o,e,h,f,g
Important If additional information about the Code 11 bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: Y = 1 digit N = 2 digits Default Value: N Accepted Values: 1 to 32000 Default Value: value set by ^BY Accepted Values: Y = yes N = no Default Value: Y Accepted Values: Y = yes N = no Default Value: N

e = check digit

h = bar code height (in dots) f = print interpretation line

g = print interpretation line above code

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^B1

Example This is an example of the Code 11 bar code:

ZPL II CODE ^XA ^FO100,100^BY3 ^B1N,N,150,Y,N ^FD123456^FS ^XZ

CODE 11 BAR CODE

CODE 11 BAR CODE CHARACTERS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 -

Internal Start/Stop Character: When used as a stop character: is used with 1 check digit is used with 2 check digits

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^B2

^B2
Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code
Description The ^B2 command produces the Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code, a high-density, self-checking, continuous, numeric symbology. Each data character for the Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code is composed of five elements: five bars or five spaces. Of the five elements, two are wide and three are narrow. The bar code is formed by interleaving characters formed with all spaces into characters formed with all bars. ^B2 supports print ratios of 2.0:1 to 3.0:1. Field data (^FD) is limited to the width (or length, if rotated) of the label. Format ^B2o,h,f,g,e,j
Important If additional information about the Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: 1 to 32000 Default Value: value set by ^BY Accepted Values: Y = yes N = no Default Value: Y Accepted Values: Y = yes N = no Default Value: N Accepted Values: Y = yes N = no Default Value: N

h = bar code height (in dots) f = print interpretation line

g = print interpretation line above code

e = calculate and print Mod 10 check digit

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^B2

Example This is an example of an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code:

ZPL II CODE ^XA ^FO100,100^BY3 ^B2N,150,Y,N,N ^FD123456^FS ^XZ

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 BAR CODE

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 BAR CODE CHARACTERS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Start/Stop (internal)

Comments The total number of digits in an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code must be even. The printer automatically adds a leading 0 (zero) if an odd number of digits is received. The Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code uses the Mod 10 check-digit scheme for error checking. For more information on Mod 10 check digits, see Mod 10 Check Digit on page 362.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^B3

^B3
Code 39 Bar Code
Description The Code 39 bar code is the standard for many industries, including the U.S. Department of Defense. It is one of three symbologies identified in the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standard MH10.8M-1983. Code 39 is also known as USD-3 Code and 3 of 9 Code. Each character in a Code 39 bar code is composed of nine elements: five bars, four spaces, and an inter-character gap. Three of the nine elements are wide; the six remaining elements are narrow. ^B3 supports print ratios of 2.0:1 to 3.0:1. Field data (^FD) is limited to the width (or length, if rotated) of the label. Code 39 automatically generates the start and stop character (*). Asterisk (*) for start and stop character prints in the interpretation line, if the interpretation line is turned on. Code 39 is capable of encoding the full 128-character ASCII set. Format ^B3o,e,h,f,g,j,m,n
Important If additional information about the Code 39 bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: Y = yes N = no Default Value: N Accepted Values: 1 to 32000 Default Value: value set by ^BY

e = Mod-43 check digit

h = bar code height (in dots)

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^B3

Parameters

Details

f = print interpretation line

Accepted Values: Y = yes N = no Default Value: Y Accepted Values: Y = yes N = no Default Value: N

g = print interpretation line above code

Example This is an example of a Code 39 bar code:

ZPL II CODE ^XA ^FO100,100^BY3 ^B3N,N,100,Y,N ^FD123ABC^FS ^XZ

CODE 39 BAR CODE

CODE 39 BAR CODE CHARACTERS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z . $ / + % Space

Comments Extended ASCII is a function of the scanner, not of the bar code. Your scanner must have extended ASCII enabled for this feature to work. To enable extended ASCII in the Code 39, you must first encode +$ in your ^FD statement. To disable extended ASCII, you must encode -$ in your ^FD statement.
Example This example encodes a carriage return with line feed into a Code 39 bar code:

ZPL II CODE
^XA ^FO20,20 ^B3N,N,100,Y ^FDTEST+$$M$J-$^FS ^XZ

GENERATED LABELS

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^B3

Full ASCII Mode for Code 39

Code 39 can generate the full 128-character ASCII set using paired characters as shown in these tables:

Table 1 Code 39 Full ASCII Mode

ASCII
SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS FS RS US

Code 39
$A $B $C $D $E $F $G $H $I $J $K $L $M $N $O $P $Q $R $S $T $U $V $W $X $Y $Z %A %B %C %D %E

ASCII
SP ! # $ % & ( ) * ++ . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?

Code 39
Space /A /B /C /D /E /F /G /H /I /J /K /L . /O O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 /Z %F %G %H %I %J

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^B3

Table 2 Code 39 Full ASCII Mode

ASCII
@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _

Code 39
%V A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z %K %L %M %N %O

ASCII
a b c d e f g h I j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ DEL

Code 39
%W +A +B +C +D +E +F +G +H +I +J +K +L +M +N +O +P +Q +R +S +T +U +V +W +X +Y +Z %P %Q %R %S %T, %X

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^B4

^B4
Code 49 Bar Code
Description The ^B4 command creates a multi-row, continuous, variable-length symbology capable of encoding the full 128-character ASCII set. It is ideally suited for applications requiring large amounts of data in a small space. The code consists of two to eight rows. A row consists of a leading quiet zone, four symbol characters encoding eight code characters, a stop pattern, and a trailing quiet zone. A separator bar with a height of one module separates each row. Each symbol character encodes two characters from a set of Code 49 characters. ^B4 has a fixed print ratio. Rows can be scanned in any order. Format ^B4o,h,f,m
Important For additional information about the Code 49 bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

o = orientation

h = height multiplier of individual rows

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^B4

Parameters

Details

f = print interpretation line

Accepted Values: N = no line printed A = print interpretation line above code B = print interpretation line below code Default Value: N When the field data exceeds two rows, expect the interpretation line to extend beyond the right edge of the bar code symbol. Accepted Values: 0 = Regular Alphanumeric Mode 1 = Multiple Read Alphanumeric 2 = Regular Numeric Mode 3 = Group Alphanumeric Mode 4 = Regular Alphanumeric Shift 1 5 = Regular Alphanumeric Shift 2 A = Automatic Mode. The printer determines the starting mode by analyzing the field data. Default Value: A

m = starting mode

Example This is an example of a Code 49 bar code:

ZPL II CODE ^XA ^FO150,100^BY3 ^B4N,20,A,A ^FD12345ABCDE^FS ^XZ

CODE 49 BAR CODE

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^B4

Table 3 Code 49
Field Data Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z . SPACE $ / ++ % < (Shift 1) > (Shift 2) : (N.A.) ; (N.A.) ? (N.A.) = (Numeric Shift)

Unshifted Character Set

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z . SPACE $ / ++ %

Shift 1 Character Set

ESC FS GS RS US ! # & SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ( ) Null * , : reserved

Shift 2 Character Set

; < = > ? @ [ \ ] a b c d e f g h I j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z _ DEL { | } ~

Code 49 Shift 1 and 2 Character Substitutions

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^B4

Code 49 Field Data Character Set

The ^FD data sent to the printer when using starting modes 0 to 5 is based on the Code 49 Internal Character Set. This is shown in the first column of the Code 49 table on the previous page. These characters are Code 49 control characters: : ; < = > ? Valid field data must be supplied when using modes 0 to 5. Shifted characters are sent as a two-character sequence of a shift character followed by a character in the unshifted character set.
Example To encode a lowercase a, send a > (Shift 2) followed by an uppercase A. If

interpretation line printing is selected, a lowercase a prints in the interpretation line. This reflects what the output from the scanner reads. Code 49 uses uppercase alphanumeric characters only. If an invalid sequence is detected, the Code 49 formatter stops interpreting field data and prints a symbol with the data up to the invalid sequence. These are examples of invalid sequences: Terminating numeric mode with any characters other than 0 to 9 or a Numeric Space. Starting in Mode 4 (Regular Alphanumeric Shift 1) and the first field data character is not in the Shift 1 set. Starting in Mode 5 (Regular Alphanumeric Shift 2) and the first field data character is not in the Shift 2 set. Sending Shift 1 followed by a character not in the Shift 1 set. Sending Shift 2 followed by a character not in the Shift 2 set. Sending two Shift 1 or Shift 2 control characters.

Advantages of Using the Code 49 Automatic Mode

Using the default (Automatic Mode) completely eliminates the need for selecting the starting mode or manually performing character shifts. The Automatic Mode analyzes the incoming ASCII string, determines the proper mode, performs all character shifts, and compacts the data for maximum efficiency. Numeric Mode is selected or shifted only when five or more continuous digits are found. Numeric packaging provides no space advantage for numeric strings consisting of fewer than eight characters.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^B5

^B5
Planet Code bar code
Description The ^B5 command is supported in all printers as a resident bar code.
Note Accepted bar code characters are 0 - 9.

Format ^B5o,h,f,g This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

o = orientation code

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: 1 to 9999 Default Value: value set by ^BY Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N

h = bar code height (in dots) f = interpretation line

g = determines if the interpretation line is printed above the bar code

Example This is an example of a Planet Code bar code:

ZPL II CODE ^XA ^FO150,100^BY3 ^B5N,100,Y,0 ^FD12345678901^FS ^XZ

GENERATED LABEL

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^B7

^B7
PDF417 Bar Code
Description The ^B7 command produces the PDF417 bar code, a two-dimensional, multirow, continuous, stacked symbology. PDF417 is capable of encoding over 1,000 characters per bar code. It is ideally suited for applications requiring large amounts of information at the time the bar code is read. The bar code consists of three to 90 stacked rows. Each row consists of start and stop patterns and symbol characters called code-words. A code-word consists of four bars and four spaces. A three code-word minimum is required per row. The PDF417 bar code is also capable of using the structured append option (^FM), which allows you to extend the field data limitations by printing multiple bar codes. For more information on using structured append, see ^FM on page 142. PDF417 has a fixed print ratio. Field data (^FD) is limited to 3K of character data.

Format ^B7o,h,s,c,r,t This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: 1 to height of label Default Value: value set by ^BY This number multiplied by the module equals the height of the individual rows in dots. 1 is not a recommended value. Accepted Values: 1 to 8 (error detection and correction) Default Value: 0 (error detection only) This determines the number of error detection and correction code-words to be generated for the symbol. The default level provides only error detection without correction. Increasing the security level adds increasing levels of error correction and increases the symbol size. Accepted Values: 1 to 30 Default Value: 1:2 (row-to-column aspect ratio) You can specify the number of code-word columns giving control over the width of the symbol.

h = bar code height for individual rows (in dots) s = security level

c = number of data columns to encode

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^B7

Parameters

Details

r = number of rows to encode

Accepted Values: 3 to 90 Default Value: 1:2 (row-to-column aspect ratio) You can specify the number of symbol rows giving control over the height of the symbol. For example, with no row or column values entered, 72 code-words would be encoded into a symbol of six columns and 12 rows. Depending on codewords, the aspect ratio is not always exact. Accepted Values: N = no truncation Y = perform truncation Default Value: N

t = truncate right row indicators and stop pattern

Example This is an example of a PDF417 bar code:

ZPL II CODE ^XA ^BY2,3 ^FO10,10^B7N,5,5,,83,N ^FDZebra Technologies Corporation strives to be the expert supplier of innovative solutions to speciality demand labeling and ticketing problems of business and government. We will attract and retain the best people who will understand our customer's needs and provide them with systems, hardware, software, consumables and service offering the best value, high quality, and reliable performance, all delivered in a timely manner. ^FS^XZ

PDF417 BAR CODE

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^B7

Example This is an example of a PDF417 without and with truncation selected:

Example This example shows the ^B7 command used with field hex (^FH) characters:
ZPL II CODE ^XA ^FO50,50^BY3,3.0^B7N,8,5,7,21,N ^FH_^FD[)>_1E06_1DP12345678_1DQ160 _1D1JUN123456789A2B4C6D8E_1D20LA6-987 _1D21L54321 ZES_1D15KG1155 _1DBSC151208_1D7Q10GT_1E_04^FS ^XZ GENERATED LABEL

Comments Noted in this bulleted list: If both columns and rows are specified, their product must be less than 928. No symbol is printed if the product of columns and rows is greater than 928. No symbol is printed if total code-words are greater than the product of columns and rows. Serialization is not allowed with this bar code. The truncation feature can be used in situations where label damage is not likely. The right row indicators and stop pattern is reduced to a single module bar width. The difference between a non truncated and a truncated bar code is shown in the previous examples.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^B7

Special Considerations for ^BY When Using PDF417

When used with ^B7, the parameters for the ^BY command are: w = module width (in dots) Accepted Values: 2 to 10 Default Value: 2 r = ratio Fixed Value: 3 (ratio has no effect on PDF417) h = height of bars (in dots) Accepted Values: 1 to 32000 Default Value: 10 PDF417 uses this only when row height is not specified in the ^B7 h parameter.

Special Considerations for ^FD When Using PDF417

The character set sent to the printer with the ^FD command includes the full ASCII set, except for those characters with special meaning to the printer. See Zebra Code Page 850 on page 340, ^CC ~CC on page 107, and ^CT ~CT on page 118. CR and LF are also valid characters for all ^FD statements. This scheme is used:

\& = carriage return/line feed \\ = backslash (\)

^CI13 must be selected to print a backslash (\).

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^B8

^B8
EAN-8 Bar Code
Description The ^B8 command is the shortened version of the EAN-13 bar code. EAN is an acronym for European Article Numbering. Each character in the EAN-8 bar code is composed of four elements: two bars and two spaces. ^B8 supports a fixed ratio. Field data (^FD) is limited to exactly seven characters. ZPL II automatically pads or truncates on the left with zeros to achieve the required number of characters. When using JAN-8 (Japanese Article Numbering), a specialized application of EAN-8, the first two non-zero digits sent to the printer are always 49. Format ^B8o,h,f,g
Important If additional information about the EAN-8 bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: 1 to 32000 Default Value: value set by ^BY Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: Y Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N

h = bar code height (in dots) f = print interpretation line

g = print interpretation line above code

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^B8

Example This is an example of an EAN-8 bar code:

ZPL II CODE ^XA ^FO100,100^BY3 ^B8N,100,Y,N ^FD1234567^FS ^XZ

EAN-8 BAR CODE

EAN-8 BAR CODE CHARACTERS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^B9

^B9
UPC-E Bar Code
Description The ^B9 command produces a variation of the UPC symbology used for number system 0. It is a shortened version of the UPC-A bar code, where zeros are suppressed, resulting in codes that require less printing space. The 6 dot/mm, 12 dot/mm, and 24 dot/mm printheads produce the UPC and EAN symbologies at 100 percent of their size. However, an 8 dot/mm printhead produces the UPC and EAN symbologies at a magnification factor of 77 percent. Each character in a UPC-E bar code is composed of four elements: two bars and two spaces. The ^BY command must be used to specify the width of the narrow bar. ^B9 supports a fixed ratio. Field data (^FD) is limited to exactly 10 characters, requiring a five-digit manufacturers code and five-digit product code. When using the zero-suppressed versions of UPC, you must enter the full 10-character sequence. ZPL II calculates and prints the shortened version. Format ^B9,h,f,g,e
Important If additional information about the UPC-E bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

o = orientation

h = bar code height (in dots) f = print interpretation line

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^B9

Parameters

Details

g = print interpretation line above code

Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: Y

e = print check digit

Example This is an example of a UPC-E bar code:

ZPL II CODE ^XA ^FO150,100^BY3 ^B9N,100,Y,N,Y ^FD1230000045^FS ^XZ

UPC-E BAR CODE

UPC-E BAR CODE CHARACTERS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Rules for Proper Product Code Numbers

If the last three digits in the manufacturers number are 000, 100, or 200, valid product code numbers are 00000 to 00999. If the last three digits in the manufacturers number are 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, or 900, valid product code numbers are 00000 to 00099. If the last two digits in the manufacturers number are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, or 90, valid product code numbers are 00000 to 00009. If the manufacturers number does not end in zero (0), valid product code numbers are 00005 to 00009.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BA

^BA
Code 93 Bar Code
Description The ^BA command creates a variable length, continuous symbology. The Code 93 bar code is used in many of the same applications as Code 39. It uses the full 128-character ASCII set. ZPL II, however, does not support ASCII control codes or escape sequences. It uses the substitute characters shown below.
Control Code ZPL II Substitute

Ctrl $ Ctrl % Ctrl / Ctrl +

& ( )

Each character in the Code 93 bar code is composed of six elements: three bars and three spaces. Although invoked differently, the human-readable interpretation line prints as though the control code has been used. ^BA supports a fixed print ratio. Field data (^FD) is limited to the width (or length, if rotated) of the label. Format ^BAo,h,f,g,e
Important If additional information about the Code 93 bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

o = orientation

h = bar code height (in dots) f = print interpretation line

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BA

Parameters

Details

g = print interpretation line above code

Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N

e = print check digit

Example This is an example of a Code 93 bar code:

Comments All control codes are used in pairs. Code 93 is also capable of encoding the full 128-character ASCII set. For more details, see Table 4 on page 41.

Full ASCII Mode for Code 93

Code 93 can generate the full 128-character ASCII set using paired characters as shown in Table 4 on page 41.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BA

Table 4 Code 93 Full ASCII Mode

ASCII
NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS FS RS US

Code 93
U &A &B &C &D &E &F &G &H &I &J &K &L &M &N &O &P &Q &R &S &T &U &V &W &X &Y &Z A B C D E

ASCII
SP ! # $ % & ( ) * ++ . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?

Code 93
Space (A (B (C (D (E (F (G (H (I (J ++ (L . / O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (Z F G H I J

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BA

Table 5 Code 93 Full ASCII Mode

ASCII
@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _

Code 93
V A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z K L M N O

ASCII
a b c d e f g h I j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ DEL

Code 93
W )A )B )C )D )E )F )G )H )I )J )K )L )M )N )O )P )Q )R )S )T )U )V )W )X )Y )Z P Q R S T

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BB

^BB
CODABLOCK Bar Code
Description The ^BB command produces a two-dimensional, multirow, stacked symbology. It is ideally suited for applications that require large amounts of information. Depending on the mode selected, the code consists of one to 44 stacked rows. Each row begins and ends with a start and stop pattern. CODABLOCK A supports variable print ratios. CODABLOCK E and F support only fixed print ratios.

Format ^BBo,h,s,c,r,m
Important If additional information about the CODABLOCK bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: N Accepted Values: 2 to 32000 Default Value: 8 This number, multiplied by the module, equals the height of the individual row in dots. Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: Y Security level determines whether symbol check-sums are generated and added to the symbol. Check sums are never generated for single-row symbols. This can be turned off only if parameter m is set to A. Accepted Values: 2 to 62 characters This is used to encode a CODABLOCK symbol. It gives the you control over the width of the symbol.

h = bar code height for individual rows (in dots) s = security level

c = number of characters per row (data columns)

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BB

Parameters

Details

r = number of rows to encode

Accepted Values: for CODABLOCK A: 1 to 22 for CODABLOCK E and F: 2 to 4 If values for c and r are not specified, a single row is produced. If a value for r is not specified, and c exceeds the maximum range, a single row equal to the field data length is produced. If a value for c is not specified, the number of characters per row is derived by dividing the field data by the value of r. If both parameters are specified, the amount of field data must be less than the product of the specified parameters. If the field data exceeds the value of the product, either no symbol or an error code is printed (if ^CV is active). If the data field contains primarily numeric data, fewer than the specified rows might be printed. If the field data contains several shift and code-switch characters, more than the specified number of rows might be printed.

m = mode

Accepted Values: A, E, F CODABLOCK A uses the Code 39 character set. CODABLOCK F uses the Code 128 character set. CODABLOCK E uses the Code 128 character set and automatically adds FNC1. Default Value: F

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BB

Example This is an example of a CODABLOCK bar code:

Special Considerations for the ^BY Command When Using ^BB

The parameters for the ^BYw,r,h command, when used with a ^BB code, are as follows: w = module width (in dots) Accepted Values: 2 to 10 (CODABLOCK A only) Default Value: 2 r = ratio Fixed Value: 3 (ratio has no effect on CODABLOCK E or F) h = height of bars (in dots) Accepted Values: 1 to 32,32000 Default Value: 10 CODABLOCK uses this as the overall symbol height only when the row height is not specified in the ^BB h parameter.

Special Considerations for ^FD Character Set When Using ^BB

The character set sent to the printer depends on the mode selected in parameter m. CODABLOCK A: CODABLOCK A uses the same character set as Code 39. If any other character is used in the ^FD statement, either no bar code is printed or an error message is printed (if ^CV is active). CODABLOCK E: The Automatic Mode includes the full ASCII set except for those characters with special meaning to the printer. Function codes or the Code 128 Subset A <nul> character can be inserted using of the ^FH command.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BB

<fnc1> = 80 hex <fnc2> = 81 hex <nul> = 84 hex

<fnc3> = 82 hex <fnc4> = 83 hex

For any other character above 84 hex, either no bar code is printed or an error message is printed (if ^CV is active). CODABLOCK F: CODABLOCK F uses the full ASCII set, except for those characters with special meaning to the printer. Function codes or the Code 128 Subset A <nul> character can be inserted using of the ^FH command. <fnc1> = 80 hex <fnc2> = 81 hex <nul> = 84 hex <fnc3> = 82 hex <fnc4> = 83 hex

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BC

^BC
Code 128 Bar Code (Subsets A, B, and C)
Description The ^BC command creates the Code 128 bar code, a high-density, variable length, continuous, alphanumeric symbology. It was designed for complexly encoded product identification. Code 128 has three subsets of characters. There are 106 encoded printing characters in each set, and each character can have up to three different meanings, depending on the character subset being used. Each Code 128 character consists of six elements: three bars and three spaces. ^BC supports a fixed print ratio. Field data (^FD) is limited to the width (or length, if rotated) of the label. Format ^BCo,h,f,g,e,m
Important If additional information about the Code 128 bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: 1 to 32000 Default Value: value set by ^BY Accepted Values: Y (yes) or N (no) Default Value: Y The interpretation line can be printed in any font by placing the font command before the bar code command. Accepted Values: Y (yes) or N (no) Default Value: N

h = bar code height (in dots) f = print interpretation line g = print interpretation line above code

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BC

Parameters

Details

e = UCC check digit

Accepted Values: Y (turns on) or N (turns off) Mod 103 check digit is always there. It cannot be turned on or off. Mod 10 and 103 appear together with e turned on. Default Value: N

m = mode

Accepted Values: N = no selected mode U = UCC Case Mode More than 19 digits in ^FD or ^SN are eliminated.

Fewer than 19 digits in ^FD or ^SN add zeros to the right to bring the count to 19. This produces an invalid interpretation line. A = Automatic Mode This analyzes the data sent and automatically determines the best packing method. The full ASCII character set can be used in the ^FD statement the printer determines when to shift subsets. A string of four or more numeric digits causes an automatic shift to Subset C. D = UCC/EAN Mode (x.11.x and newer firmware) This allows dealing with UCC/EAN with and without chained application identifiers. The code starts in the appropriate subset followed by FNC1 to indicate a UCC/EAN 128 bar code. The printer automatically strips out parentheses and spaces for encoding, but prints them in the human-readable section. The printer automatically determines if a check digit is required, calculate it, and print it. Automatically sizes the human readable. Default Value: N
Example This is an example of a Code 128 bar code:

CODE 128 BAR CODE

ZPL II CODE ^XA ^FO100,100^BY3 ^BCN,100,Y,N,N ^FD123456^FS ^XZ

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BC

Code 128 Subsets

The Code 128 character subsets are referred to as Subset A, Subset B, and Subset C. A subset can be selected in these ways: A special Invocation Code can be included in the field data (^FD) string associated with that bar code. The desired Start Code can be placed at the beginning of the field data. If no Start Code is entered, Subset B are used. To change subsets within a bar code, place the Invocation Code at the appropriate points within the field data (^FD) string. The new subset stays in effect until changed with the Invocation Code. For example, in Subset C, >7 in the field data changes the Subset to A. Table 6 shows the Code 128 Invocation Codes and Start Characters for the three subsets. Table 6 Code 128 Invocation Characters
Invocation Code >< >0 >= >1 >2 >3 >4 >5 >6 >7 >8 Decimal Value 62 30 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 Subset A Character > USQ FNC 3 FNC 2 SHIFT CODE C CODE B FNC 4 FNC 1 Subset B Character > ~ DEL FNC 3 FNC 2 SHIFT CODE C FNC 4 CODE A FNC 1 Subset C Character

CODE B CODE A FNC 1

Start Characters 103 >9 104 >: 105 >;

Start Code A Start Code B Start Code C

(Numeric Pairs give Alpha/Numerics) (Normal Alpha/Numeric) (All numeric (00 - 99)

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BC

Table 7 shows the character sets for Code 128:

Table 7 Code 128 character sets

Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52

Code A SP ! '' # $ % & ' ( ) * ++ , . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T

Code B SP ! '' # $ % & ' ( ) * ++ , . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T

Code C 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52

Value 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105

Code A U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US FNC3 FNC2 SHIFT Code C Code B FNC4 FNC1

Code B U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ . a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ DEL FNC3 FNC2 SHIFT Code C FNC4 Code A FNC1 START (Code A) START (Code B) START (Code C)

Code C 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 Code B Code A FNC1

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BC

Example Figures A and B are examples of identical bar codes, and Figure C is an example of switching from Subset C to B to A, as follows:

Because Code 128 Subset B is the most commonly used subset, ZPL II defaults to Subset B if no start character is specified in the data string.

^XA ^FO50,50 ^BY3^BCN,100,Y,N,N ^FD>;382436>6CODE128>752375152^FS ^XZ Figure C: Switching from Subset C to B to A

How ^BC Works Within a ZPL II Script ^XA the first command starts the label format. ^FO100,75 the second command sets the field origin at 100 dots across the x-axis and 75 dots down the y-axis from the upper-left corner. ^BCN,100,Y,N,N the third command calls for a Code 128 bar code to be printed with no rotation (N) and a height of 100 dots. An interpretation line is printed (Y) below the bar code (N). No UCC check digit is used (N). ^FDCODE128^FS (Figure A) ^FD>:CODE128^FS (Figure B) the field data command specifies the content of the bar code. ^XZ the last command ends the field data and indicates the end of the label.
The interpretation line prints below the code with the UCC check digit turned off.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BC

The ^FD command for Figure A does not specify any subset, so Subset B is used. In Figure B, the ^FD command specifically calls Subset B with the >: Start Code. Although ZPL II defaults to Code B, it is good practice to include the Invocation Codes in the command. Code 128 Subset B is programmed directly as ASCII text, except for values greater than 94 decimal and a few special characters that must be programmed using the invocation codes. Those characters are: ^ > ~
Example Code 128 Subsets A and C

Code 128, Subsets A and C are programmed in pairs of digits, 00 to 99, in the field data string. For details, see Table 6 on page 49. In Subset A, each pair of digits results in a single character being encoded in the bar code; in Subset C, characters are printed as entered. Figure E below is an example of Subset A (>9 is the Start Code for Subset A). Nonintegers programmed as the first character of a digit pair (D2) are ignored. However, nonintegers programmed as the second character of a digit pair (2D) invalidate the entire digit pair, and the pair is ignored. An extra unpaired digit in the field data string just before a code shift is also ignored. Figure C and Figure D below are examples of Subset C. Notice that the bar codes are identical. In the program code for Figure D, the D is ignored and the 2 is paired with the 4.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BC

The UCC/EAN-128 Symbology

The symbology specified for the representation of Application Identifier data is UCC/EAN128, a variant of Code 128, exclusively reserved to EAN International and the Uniform Code Council (UCC).
Note It is not intended to be used for data to be scanned at the point of sales in retail outlets.

UCC/EAN-128 offers several advantages. It is one of the most complete, alphanumeric, onedimensional symbologies available today. The use of three different character sets (A, B and C), facilitates the encoding of the full 128 ASCII character set. Code 128 is one of the most compact linear bar code symbologies. Character set C enables numeric data to be represented in a double density mode. In this mode, two digits are represented by only one symbol character saving valuable space. The code is concatenated. That means that multiple AIs and their fields may be combined into a single bar code. The code is also very reliable. Code 128 symbols use two independent self-checking features which improves printing and scanning reliability. UCC/EAN-128 bar codes always contain a special non-data character known as function 1 (FNC 1), which follows the start character of the bar code. It enables scanners and processing software to auto-discriminate between UCC/EAN-128 and other bar code symbologies, and subsequently only process relevant data. The UCC/EAN-128 bar code is made up of a leading quiet zone, a Code 128 start character A, B, or C, a FNC 1 character, Data (Application Identifier plus data field), a symbol check character, a stop character, and a trailing quiet zone. UCC/EAN, UCC/128 are a couple of ways you'll hear someone refer to the code. This just indicates that the code is structured as dictated by the application identifiers that are used. SSCC (Serial Shipping Container Code) formatted following the data structure layout for Application Identifier 00. See Table 8, UCC Application Identifier Table on page 57. It could be 00 which is the SSCC code. The customer needs to let us know what application identifiers are used for their bar code so we can help them. There are several ways of writing the code to print the code to Application Identifier '00' structure.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BC

Using N for the mode (m) parameter

Example This example shows with application identifier 00 structure:

N FOR THE M PARAMETER

ZPL II CODE ^XA ^FO90,200^BY4 ^BCN,256,Y,N,Y,N ^FD>;>80012345123451234512^FS ^XZ

>;>8' sets it to subset C, function 1 '00' is the application identifier followed by '17 characters', the check digit is selected using the 'Y' for the (e) parameter to automatically print the 20th character. you are not limited to 19 characters with mode set to N

Using U for the mode (m) parameter

Example The example shows the application identifier 00 format:

U FOR THE M PARAMETER

ZPL II CODE ^XA ^FO90,200 ^BY4^BC,256,Y,N,,U ^FD0012345123451234512^FS ^XZ

UCC Case Mode Choosing U selects UCC Case mode. You will have exactly 19 characters available in ^FD. Subset C using FNC1 values are automatically selected. Check digit is automatically inserted.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BC

Using D for the mode (m) parameter

Example This example shows application identifier 00 format ((x.11.x and above):

D FOR THE M PARAMETER

ZPL II CODE ^XA ^FO50,200^BCN,150,Y,N,,D ^FD(00)10084423 7449200940^FS ^XZ

(0 at end of field data is a bogus character that is inserted as a place holder for the check digit the printer will automatically insert. Subset C using FNC1 values are automatically selected. Parentheses and spaces can be in the field data. '00' application identifier, followed by 17 characters, followed by bogus check digit place holder. Check digit is automatically inserted. The printer will automatically calculate the check digit and put it into the bar code and interpretation line. The interpretation line will also show the parentheses and spaces but will strip them out from the actual bar code.

Printing the Interpretation Line

Example This example shows printing the interpretation in a different font with firmware

x.11.x and above:

INTERPRETATION LINE ZPL II CODE ^XA ^FO50,200 ^A0N,40,30^BCN,150,Y,N,Y ^FD>;>80012345123451234512^FS

The font command (^A0N,40,30) can be added and changed to alter the font and size of the interpretation line.

With firmware version older than x.10.x

A separate text field needs to be written. The interpretation line needs to be turned off.

^A0N,50,40 is the font and size selection for the separate text field.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BC

You have to make sure you enter the correct check digit in the text field. Creating a separate text field allows you to format the interpretation line with parentheses and spaces.

FIRMWARE OLDER THAN X.10.X

ZPL II CODE
^XA ^FO25,25 ^BCN,150,N,N,Y ^FD>;>80012345123451234512^FS ^FO100,190 ^A0N,50,40 ^FD(00) 1 2345123 451234512 0^FS ^XZ

Application Identifiers UCC/EAN APPLICATION IDENTIFIER

An Application Identifier is a prefix code used to identify the meaning and the format of the data that follows it (data field). There are AIs for identification, traceability, dates, quantity, measurements, locations, and many other types of information. For example, the AI for batch number is 10, and the batch number AI is always followed by an alphanumeric batch code not to exceed 20-characters. The UCC/EAN Application Identifiers provide an open standard that can be used and understood by all companies in the trading chain, regardless of the company that originally issued the codes.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BC

Table 8 UCC Application Identifier Table

Data Content
AI Plus The Following Data Structure

Serial Shipping Container Code (SSCC) Shipping Container Code Batch Numbers Production Date (YYMMDD) Packaging Date (YYMMDD) Sell By Date (YYMMDD) Expiration Date (YYMMDD) Product Variant Serial Number HIBCC Quantity, Date, Batch and Link Lot Number Quantity Each Net Weight (Kilograms) Length, Meters Width or Diameter (Meters) Depths (Meters) Area (Sq. Meters) Volume (Liters) Volume (Cubic Meters) Net Weight (Pounds) Customer PO Number Ship To (Deliver To) Location Code using EAN 13 or DUNS Number with leading zeros Bill To (Invoice To) Location Code using EAN 13 or DUNS Number with leading zeros Purchase from Ship To (Deliver To) Postal Code within single postal authority Ship To (Deliver To) Postal Code with 3digit ISO Country Code Prefix Roll Products - width, length, core diameter, direction and splices Electronic Serial number for cellular mobile phone

00 01 10 11 13 15 17 20 21 22 23* 30 310** 311** 312** 313** 314** 315** 316** 320** 400 410

exactly 18 digits exactly 14 digits up to 20 alpha numerics exactly 6 digits exactly 6 digits exactly 6 digits exactly 6 digits exactly 2 digits up to 20 alpha numerics up to 29 alpha numerics up to 19 alpha numerics exactly 6 digits exactly 6 digits exactly 6 digits exactly 6 digits exactly 6 digits exactly 6 digits exactly 6 digits exactly 6 digits up to 29 alpha numerics exactly 13 digits

411

exactly 13 digits

412 420 421 8001 8002

exactly 13 digits up to 9 alpha numerics 3 digits plus up to 9 alpha numerics exactly 14 digits up to 20 alpha numerics

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BC

Note Table 8 is a partial table showing the application identifiers. For more current and

complete information, search the Internet for UCC Application Identifier. For date fields that only need to indicate a year and month, the day field is set to 00. * Plus one digit for length indication. ** Plus one digit for decimal point indication.

Chaining several application identifiers (firmware x.11.x and later)

The FNC1, which is invoked by >8, is inserted just before the AI's so that the scanners reading the code sees the FNC1 and knows that an AI follows.
Example This is an example with the mode parameter set to A (automatic):

^XA ^BY2,2.5,193 ^FO33,400 ^BCN,,N,N,N,A ^FD>;>80204017773003486100008535>8910001>837252^FS ^FT33,625^AEN,0,0^FD(02)04017773003486(10)0008535(91) 0001(37)252^FS ^XZ

Example This is an example with the mode parameter set to U:

^XA ^BY3,2.5,193 ^FO33,200 ^BCN,,N,N,N,U ^FD>;>80204017773003486>8100008535>8910001>837252^FS ^FT33,455^A0N,30,30^FD(02)04017773003486(10)0008535(9 1)0001(37)252^FS ^XZ

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BC

Example This is an example with the mode parameter set to D*:

^XA ^PON ^LH0,0 ^BY2,2.5,145 ^FO218,343 ^BCB,,Y,N,N,D ^FD(91)0005886>8(10)0000410549>8(99)05^FS ^XZ

D* When trying to print the last Application Identifier with an odd number of characters, a problem existed when printing EAN128 bar codes using Mode D. The problem was fixed in firmware V60.13.0.6.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BD

^BD
UPS MaxiCode Bar Code
Description The ^BD command creates a two-dimensional, optically read (not scanned) code. This symbology was developed by UPS (United Parcel Service). Notice that there are no additional parameters for this code and it does not generate an interpretation line. The ^BY command has no effect on the UPS MaxiCode bar code. However, the ^CV command can be activated. Format ^BDm,n,t This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

m = mode

Accepted Values: 2 = structured carrier message: numeric postal code (U.S.) 3 = structured carrier message: alphanumeric postal code (non-U.S.) 4 = standard symbol, secretary 5 = full EEC 6 = reader program, secretary Default Value: 2 Accepted Values: 1 to 8 can be added in a structured document Default Value: 1 Accepted Values: 1 to 8, representing the total number of symbols in this sequence Default Value: 1

n = symbol number t = total number of symbols

Example This is an example of UPS MAXICODE - MODE 2 bar code:

UPS MAXICODE - MODE 2

ZPL II CODE ^XA ^FO50,50 ^CVY ^BD^FH^FD001840152382802 [)>_1E01_1D961Z00004951_1DUPSN_ 1D_06X610_1D159_1D1234567_1D1/1_ 1D_1DY_1D634 ALPHA DR_ 1DPITTSBURGH_1DPA_1E_04^FS ^FO30,300^A0,30,30^FDMode2^FS ^XZ

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BD

Special Considerations for ^FD when Using ^BD

The ^FD statement is divided into two parts: a high priority message (hpm) and a low priority message (lpm). There are two types of high priority messages. One is for a U.S. Style Postal Code; the other is for a non-U.S. Style Postal Code. The syntax for either of these high priority messages must be exactly as shown or an error message is generated. Format ^FD <hpm><lpm> This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

<hpm> = high priority message (applicable only in Modes 2 and 3)

Accepted Values: 0 to 9, except where noted U.S. Style Postal Code (Mode 2) <hpm> = aaabbbcccccdddd aaa = three-digit class of service bbb = three-digit country zip code ccccc = five-digit zip code dddd = four-digit zip code extension (if none exists, four zeros (0000) must be entered) non-U.S. Style Postal Code (Mode 3) <hpm> = aaabbbcccccc aaa = three-digit class of service bbb = three-digit country zip code ccccc = six-digit zip code (A through Z or 0 to 9) GS is used to separate fields in a message (0x1D). RS is used to separate format types (0x1E). EOT is the end of transmission characters. Message Header [)>RS Transportation Data Format Header 01GS96 Tracking Number* <tracking number> SCAC* GS<SCAC> UPS Shipper Number GS<shipper number> Julian Day of Pickup GS<day of pickup> Shipment ID Number GS<shipment ID number> Package n/x GS<n/x> Package Weight GS<weight> Address Validation GS<validation> Ship to Street Address GS<street address> Ship to City GS<city> Ship to State GS<state> RS RS End of Message EOT (* Mandatory Data for UPS)

<lpm> = low priority message (only applicable in Modes 2 and 3)

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BD

Comments The formatting of <hpm> and <lpm> apply only when using Modes 2 and 3. Mode 4, for example, takes whatever data is defined in the ^FD command and places it in the symbol. UPS requires that certain data be present in a defined manner. When formatting MaxiCode data for UPS, always use uppercase characters. When filling in the fields in the <lpm> for UPS, follow the data size and types specified in Guide to Bar Coding with UPS. If you do not choose a mode, the default is Mode 2. If you use non-U.S. Postal Codes, you probably get an error message (invalid character or message too short). When using nonU.S. codes, use Mode 3. ZPL II doesnt automatically change your mode based on the zip code format. When using special characters, such as GS, RS, or EOT, use the ^FH command to tell ZPL II to use the hexadecimal value following the underscore character ( _ ).

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BE

^BE
EAN-13 Bar Code
Description The ^BE command is similar to the UPC-A bar code. It is widely used throughout Europe and Japan in the retail marketplace. The EAN-13 bar code has 12 data characters, one more data character than the UPC-A code. An EAN-13 symbol contains the same number of bars as the UPC-A, but encodes a 13th digit into a parity pattern of the left-hand six digits. This 13th digit, in combination with the 12th digit, represents a country code. ^BE supports fixed print ratios. Field data (^FD) is limited to exactly 12 characters. ZPL II automatically truncates or pads on the left with zeros to achieve the required number of characters. When using JAN-13 (Japanese Article Numbering), a specialized application of EAN-13, the first two non-zero digits sent to the printer must be 49. Format ^BEo,h,f,g

Note Use Interleaved 2 of 5 for UCC and EAN 14.

Important If additional information about the EAN-13 bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: 1 to 32000 Default Value: value set by ^BY Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: Y Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N

h = bar code height (in dots) f = print interpretation line

g = print interpretation line above code

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BE

Example This is an example of an EAN-13 bar code:

Comments The EAN-13 bar code uses the Mod 10 check-digit scheme for error checking. For more information on Mod 10, see Mod 10 Check Digit on page 362.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BF

^BF
Micro-PDF417 Bar Code
Description The ^BF command creates a two-dimensional, multi-row, continuous, stacked symbology identical to PDF417, except it replaces the 17-module-wide start and stop patterns and left/right row indicators with a unique set of 10-module-wide row address patterns. These reduce overall symbol width and allow linear scanning at row heights as low as 2X. Micro-PDF417 is designed for applications with a need for improved area efficiency but without the requirement for PDF417s maximum data capacity. It can be printed only in specific combinations of rows and columns up to a maximum of four data columns by 44 rows. Field data (^FD) and field hexadecimal (^FH) are limited to: 250 7-bit characters 150 8-bit characters 366 4-bit numeric characters Format ^BFo,h,m This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: 1 to 9999 Default Value: value set by ^BY or 10 (if no ^BY value exists). Accepted Values: 0 to 33 (see Micro-PDF417 Mode on page 67) Default Value: 0 (see Micro-PDF417 Mode on page 67)

h = bar code height (in dots) m = mode

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BF

Example This is an example of a Micro-PDF417 bar code:

To encode data into a Micro-PDF417 Bar Code, complete these steps:

1. Determine the type of data to be encoded (for example, ASCII characters, numbers, 8-bit

data, or a combination).
2. Determine the maximum amount of data to be encoded within the bar code (for example,

number of ASCII characters, quantity of numbers, or quantity of 8-bit data characters).

3. Determine the percentage of check digits that are used within the bar code. The higher the

percentage of check digits that are used, the more resistant the bar code is to damage however, the size of the bar code increases.
4. Use the chart Micro-PDF417 Mode on page 67 with the information gathered from the

questions above to select the mode of the bar code.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BF

Table 9 Micro-PDF417 Mode

Mode (M) Number Number of Data of Data Columns Rows % of Max Cws for Alpha EC Characters Max Digits

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

11 14 17 20 24 28 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 6 8 10 12 15 20 26 32 38 44 6 8 10 12 15 20 26 32 38 44 4

64 50 41 40 33 29 50 41 32 29 28 28 29 67 58 53 50 47 43 41 40 39 38 50 44 40 38 35 33 31 30 29 28 50

6 12 18 22 30 38 14 24 36 46 56 64 72 10 18 26 34 46 66 90 114 138 162 22 34 46 58 76 106 142 178 214 250 14

8 17 26 32 44 55 20 35 52 67 82 93 105 14 26 38 49 67 96 132 167 202 237 32 49 67 85 111 155 208 261 313 366 20

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BI

^BI
Industrial 2 of 5 Bar Codes
Description The ^BI command is a discrete, self-checking, continuous numeric symbology. The Industrial 2 of 5 bar code has been in use the longest of the 2 of 5 family of bar codes. Of that family, the Standard 2 of 5 (^BJ) and Interleaved 2 of 5 (^B2) bar codes are also available in ZPL II. With Industrial 2 of 5, all of the information is contained in the bars. Two bar widths are employed in this code, the wide bar measuring three times the width of the narrow bar.

^BI supports a print ratio of 2.0:1 to 3.0:1.

Field data (^FD) is limited to the width (or length, if rotated) of the label.

Format ^BIo,h,f,g
Important If additional information about the Industrial 2 of 5 bar code, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: 1 to 32000 Default Value: value set by ^BY Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: Y Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N

h = bar code height (in dots) f = print interpretation line

g = print interpretation line above code

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BI

Example This is an example of an Industrial 2 of 5 bar code:

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BJ

^BJ
Standard 2 of 5 Bar Code
Description The ^BJ command is a discrete, self-checking, continuous numeric symbology. With Standard 2 of 5, all of the information is contained in the bars. Two bar widths are employed in this code, the wide bar measuring three times the width of the narrow bar.

^BJ supports a print ratio of 2.0:1 to 3.0:1.

Field data (^FD) is limited to the width (or length, if rotated) of the label.

Format ^BJo,h,f,g
Important If additional information about the Standard 2 of 5 bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters

Details

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: 1 to 32000 Default Value: value set by ^BY Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: Y Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N

h = bar code height (in dots) f = print interpretation line

g = print interpretation line above code

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BJ

Example This is an example of a Standard 2 of 5 bar code:

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BK

^BK
ANSI Codabar Bar Code
Description The ANSI Codabar bar code is used in a variety of information processing applications such as libraries, the medical industry, and overnight package delivery companies. This bar code is also known as USD-4 code, NW-7, and 2 of 7 code. It was originally developed for retail price labeling. Each character in this code is composed of seven elements: four bars and three spaces. Codabar bar codes use two character sets, numeric and control (start and stop) characters.

^BK supports a print ratio of 2.0:1 to 3.0:1.

Field data (^FD) is limited to the width (or length, if rotated) of the label.

Format ^BKo,e,h,f,g,k,l
Important If additional information about the ANSI Codabar bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters

Details

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Fixed Value: N Accepted Values: 1 to 32000 Default Value: value set by ^BY Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: Y Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N Accepted Values: A,B, C, D Default Value: A Accepted Values: A,B, C, D Default Value: A

e = check digit h = bar code height (in dots) f = print interpretation line

g = print interpretation line above code

k = designates a start character l = designates stop character

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BK

Example This is an example of an ANSI Codabar bar code:

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BL

^BL
LOGMARS Bar Code
Description The ^BL command is a special application of Code 39 used by the Department of Defense. LOGMARS is an acronym for Logistics Applications of Automated Marking and Reading Symbols.

^BL supports a print ratio of 2.0:1 to 3.0:1.

Field data (^FD) is limited to the width (or length, if rotated) of the label. Lowercase letters in the ^FD string are converted to the supported uppercase LOGMARS characters.

Format ^BLo,h,g
Important If additional information about the LOGMARS bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

o = orientation

h = bar code height (in dots) g = print interpretation line above code

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BL

Example This is an example of a LOGMARS bar code:

Comments The LOGMARS bar code produces a mandatory check digit using Mod 43 calculations. For further information on the Mod 43 check digit, see Mod 43 Check Digit on page 363.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BM

^BM
MSI Bar Code
Description The ^BM command is a pulse-width modulated, continuous, non-self- checking symbology. It is a variant of the Plessey bar code (^BP). Each character in the MSI bar code is composed of eight elements: four bars and four adjacent spaces.

^BM supports a print ratio of 2.0:1 to 3.0:1.

For the bar code to be valid, field data (^FD) is limited to 1 to 14 digits when parameter e is B, C, or D. ^FD is limited to 1 to 13 digits when parameter e is A, plus a quiet zone.

Format ^BMo,e,h,f,g,e2
Important If additional information about the MSI bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: A = no check digits B = 1 Mod 10 C = 2 Mod 10 D = 1 Mod 11 and 1 Mod 10 Default Value: B Accepted Values: 1 to 32000 Default Value: value set by ^BY Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: Y

e = check digit selection

h = bar code height (in dots) f = print interpretation line

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BM

Parameters

Details

g = print interpretation line above code

Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N

e2 = inserts check digit into the interpretation line

Example This is an example of a MSI bar code:

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BO

^BO
Aztec Bar Code Parameters
Description The ^BO command creates a two-dimensional matrix symbology made up of square modules arranged around a bulls-eye pattern at the center.
Note The Aztec bar code works with firmware V60.13.0.11A and higher.

Format ^BOa,b,c,d,e,f,g This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: 1 to 10 Default Value: 1 on 150 dpi printers 2 on 200 dpi printers 3 on 300 dpi printers 6 on 600 dpi printers Accepted Values: Y = if data contains ECICs N = if data does not contain ECICs. Default Value: N Accepted Values: 0 = default error correction level 01 to 99 = error correction percentage (minimum) 101 to 104 = 1 to 4-layer compact symbol 201 to 232 = 1 to 32-layer full-range symbol 300 = a simple Aztec Rune Default Value: 0 Accepted Values: Y = if this symbol is to be a menu (bar code reader initialization) symbol N = if it is not a menu symbol Default Value: N

b = magnification factor

c = extended channel interpretation code indicator

d = error control and symbol size/type indicator

e = menu symbol indicator

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BO

Parameters

Details

f = number of symbols for structured append g = optional ID field for structured append

Accepted Values: 1 through 26 Default Value: 1

The ID field is a text string with 24-character maximum Default Value: no ID

Example This is an example of the ^B0 command:

ZPL II CODE
^XA ^B0R,7,N,0,N,1,0 ^FD 7. This is testing label 7^FS ^XZ

GENERATED LABEL

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BP

^BP
Plessey Bar Code
Description The ^BP command is a pulse-width modulated, continuous, non-self- checking symbology. Each character in the Plessey bar code is composed of eight elements: four bars and four adjacent spaces.

^BP supports a print ratio of 2.0:1 to 3.0:1.

Field data (^FD) is limited to the width (or length, if rotated) of the label.

Format ^BPo,e,h,f,g
Important If additional information about the Plessey bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: Y Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N

e = print check digit

h = bar code height (in dots)

f = print interpretation line

g = print interpretation line above code

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BP

Example This is an example of a Plessey bar code:

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BQ

^BQ
QR Code Bar Code
Description The ^BQ command produces a matrix symbology consisting of an array of nominally square modules arranged in an overall square pattern. A unique pattern at three of the symbols four corners assists in determining bar code size, position, and inclination. A wide range of symbol sizes is possible, along with four levels of error correction. Userspecified module dimensions provide a wide variety of symbol production techniques. QR Code Model 1 is the original specification, while QR Code Model 2 is an enhanced form of the symbology. Model 2 provides additional features and can be automatically differentiated from Model 1. Model 2 is the recommended model and should normally be used. This bar code is printed using field data specified in a subsequent ^FD string. Encodable character sets include numeric data, alphanumeric data, 8-bit byte data, and Kanji characters. Format ^BQa,b,c,d,e
Important If additional information about the QR Code bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

a = field orientation b = model c = magnification factor

Fixed Value: normal (^FW has no effect on rotation) Accepted Values: 1 (original) and 2 (enhanced recommended) Default Value: 2 Accepted Values: 1 to 10 Default Value: 1 on 150 dpi printers 2 on 200 dpi printers 3 on 300 dpi printers 6 on 600 dpi printers

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BQ

Parameters

Details

d = H,Q,M,L

Accepted Values: H = ultra-high reliability level Q = high reliability level M = standard level L = high density level Default Value: Q = if empty M = invalid values Accepted Values: 1 - 7 Default Value: 7

e = N,A,B.K

Example This is an example of a QR Code bar code:

On the pages that follow are specific commands for formatting the ^BQ command with the ^FD statements that contain the information to be coded.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BQ

Considerations for ^FD When Using the QR Code: QR Switches (formatted into the ^FD field data)
mixed mode <D>

D = allows mixing of different types of character modes in one code. code No. <01 16>
Value = subtracted from the Nth number of the divided code (must be two digits). No. of divisions <02 16> Number of divisions (must be two digits). parity data <1 byte> Parity data value is obtained by calculating at the input data (the original input data before divided byte-by-byte through the EX-OR operation). error correction level <H, Q, M, L>

H = ultra-high reliability level Q = high reliability level M = standard level (default) L = high density level
character Mode <N, A, B, K>

N = numeric A = alphanumeric Bxxxx = 8-bit byte mode. This handles the 8-bit Latin/Kana character set in accordance with JIS X 0201 (character values 0x00 to 0xFF).
xxxx = number of data characters is represented by two bytes of BCD code.

K = Kanji handles only Kanji characters in accordance with the Shift JIS system based on JIS X 0208. This means that all parameters after the character mode K should be 16-bit characters. If there are any 8-bit characters (such as ASCII code), an error occurs.
data character string <Data> Follows character mode or it is the last switch in the ^FD statement. data input <A, M>

A = Automatic Input (default). Data character string JIS8 unit, Shift JIS. When the input mode is Automatic Input, the binary codes of 0x80 to 0x9F and 0xE0 to 0xFF cannot be set. M = Manual Input
Two types of data input mode exist: Automatic (A) and Manual (M). If A is specified, the character mode does not need to be specified. If M is specified, the character mode must be specified.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BQ

^FD Field Data (Normal Mode)

Automatic Data Input (A) with Switches ^FD <error correction level>A, <data character string> ^FS
Example QR Code, normal mode with automatic data input.

GENERATED LABEL

ZPL II CODE
^XA ^FO20,20^BQ,2,10^FDQA,0123456789ABCD 2D code^FS ^XZ

1 2 3

Q = error correction level A, = automatic setting data string character

Manual Data Input (M) with Switches

^FD <error correction level>M, <character mode><data character string> ^FS

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BQ

Example QR Code, normal mode with manual data input:

GENERATED LABEL

ZPL II CODE
^XA ^FO20,20^BQ,2,10 ^FDHM,N123456789012345^FS ^XZ

1 2 3 4

H = error correction level (ultra-high reliability level M, = input mode (manual input) N = character mode (numeric data) data character string

Example QR Code, normal mode with standard reliability and manual data input:

GENERATED LABEL

ZPL II CODE ^XA ^FO20,20^BQ,2,10^FDMM,AAC-42^FS ^XZ

1 2 3 4

M = error correction level (standard-high reliability level M, = manual input AC-42 = data character string A = alphanumeric data

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BQ

^FD Field Data (Mixed Mode requires more switches)

Automatic Data Input (A) with Switches
^FD <D><code No.> <No. of divisions> <parity data>, <error correction level> A, <data character string>, <data character string>, < : >, <data character string n**> ^FS

Manual Data Input (M) with Switches

^FD <code No.> <No. of divisions> <parity data>, <error correction level> M, <character mode 1> <data character string 1>, <character mode 2> <data character string 2>, < : ^FS n** up to 200 in mixed mode > < : >, <character mode n> <data character string n**>

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BQ

Example QR Code, mixed mode with manual data input:

GENERATED LABEL

ZPL II CODE
^XA ^FO,20,20^BQ,2,10 ^FDD03048F,LM,N0123456789,A12AABB,B0006qrcode^FS ^XZ

<mixed mode identifier> <code No.> <No. of divisions> <parity data>

D M D M

(mixed) (code number) (divisions) (0x8F)

<error correction level> <input mode>

L M

(high-density level) (manual input)

<character mode> <data character string>

(numeric data) 0123456789

<character mode> <data character string> <character mode> B 0006 <data character string> (8-bit byte data) (number of bytes) qrcode A (alphanumeric data) 12AABB

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BQ

Example This is an example of QR Code, mixed mode with automatic data input:

^XA ^FO20,20^BQ,2,10 ^FDD03048F,LA,012345678912AABBqrcode^FS ^XZ

D M D M L A

(mixed) (code number) (divisions) (0x8F) (high-density level) (automatic input) 012345678912AABBqrcode

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BR

^BR
RSS (Reduced Space Symbology) Bar Code
Description The ^BR command is bar code types for space-constrained identification from EAN International and the Uniform Code Council, Inc. Format ^BRa,b,c,d,e,f This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = orientation

Accepted Values: N = Normal R = Rotated I = Inverted B = Bottom-up Default Value: R Accepted Values: 1 = RSS14 2 = RSS14 Truncated 3 = RSS14 Stacked 4 = RSS14 Stacked Omnidirectional 5 = RSS Limited 6 = RSS Expanded 7 = UPC-A 8 = UPC-E 9 = EAN-13 10 = EAN-8 11 = UCC/EAN-128 & CC-A/B 12 = UCC/EAN-128 & CC-C Default Value: 1 Accepted Values: 1 to 10 Default Value: 24 dot = 6, 12 dot is 3, 8 dot and lower is 2 12 dot = 6, > 8 dot is 3, 8 dot and less is 2) Accepted Values: 1 or 2 Default Value: 1

b = symbology type in the RSS-14 family

c = magnification factor

d = separator height

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BR

Parameters

Details

e = bar code height

The bar code height only affects the linear portion of the bar code. Only UCC/EAN & CC-A/B/C. Accepted Values: 1 to 32000 dots Default Value: 25 Accepted Values: 2 to 22, even numbers only, in segments per line Default Value: 22

f = the segment width (RSS expanded only)

Example This is an example of Symbology Type 7 - UPC-A:

ZPL II CODE
^XA ^FO10,10^BRN,7,5,2,100 ^FD12345678901|this is composite info^FS ^XZ

GENERATED LABEL

Example This is an example of Symbology Type 1 - RSS14:

ZPL II CODE
^XA ^FO10,10^BRN,1,5,2,100 ^FD12345678901|this is composite info^FS ^XZ

GENERATED LABEL

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BS

^BS
UPC/EAN Extensions
Description The ^BS command is the two-digit and five-digit add-on used primarily by publishers to create bar codes for ISBNs (International Standard Book Numbers). These extensions are handled as separate bar codes. The ^BS command is designed to be used with the UPC-A bar code (^BU) and the UPC-E bar code (^B9).

^BS supports a fixed print ratio.

Field data (^FD) is limited to exactly two or five characters. ZPL II automatically truncates or pads on the left with zeros to achieve the required number of characters.

Format ^BSo,h,f,g
Important If additional information about the UPC/EAN bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: 1 to 32000 Default Value: value set by ^BY Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: Y Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: Y

h = bar code height (in dots) f = print interpretation line

g = print interpretation line above code

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated I = inverted B = bottom up Accepted Value (in dots): 1 to 10 Default Value (600 dpi printers): 4 Default Value (200- and 300 dpi printer): 2 Accepted Values: 2.0 to 3.0(increments of 0.1) Default Value: 2.0

w1 = width of the Code 39 bar code r1 = wide to narrow bar width ratio the Code 39 bar code h1 = height of the Code 39 bar code

Accepted Values (in dots): 1 to 9999 Default Value (600 dpi printer): 120 Default Value (300 dpi printer): 60 Default Value (200 dpi printer): 40 Accepted Values (in dots): 1 to 255 Default Value (600 dpi printer): 8 Default Value (200- and 300 dpi printers): 4 Accepted Values (in dots): 1 to 10 Default Value (600 dpi printer): 4 Default Value (200- and 300 dpi printers): 2

h2 = row height of the MicroPDF417 bar ode w2 = narrow bar width of the Micro-PDF417 bar code

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BT

Example TLC39 Bar Code

This is an example on how to print TLC39 bar code. The callouts identify the key components and are followed by a detailed description below: Use the command defaults to get results that are in compliance with TCIF industry standards; regardless of printhead density.

ECI Number. If the seventh character is not a comma, only Code 39 prints. This means if more than 6 digits are present, Code 39 prints for the first six digits (and no Micro-PDF symbol is printed). Must be 6 digits. Firmware generates invalid character error if the firmware sees anything but 6 digits. This number is not padded. Serial number. The serial number can contain up to 25 characters and is variable length. The serial number is stored in the Micro-PDF symbol. If a comma follows the serial number, then additional data is used below. If present, must be alphanumeric (letters and numbers, no punctuation). This value is used if a comma follows the ECI number. Additional data. If present, it is used for things such as a country code. Data cannot exceed 150 bytes. This includes serial number commas. Additional data is stored in the Micro-PDF symbol and appended after the serial number. A comma must exist between each maximum of 25 characters in the additional fields. Additional data fields can contain up to 25 alphanumeric characters per field. The result is:
ZPL II CODE ^XA^FO100, 100^BT^FD123456, ABCd12345678901234, 5551212, 88899 ^FS^XZ GENERATED LABEL

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BU

^BU
UPC-A Bar Code
Description The ^BU command produces a fixed length, numeric symbology. It is primarily used in the retail industry for labeling packages. The UPC-A bar code has 11 data characters. The 6 dot/mm, 12 dot/mm, and 24 dot/mm printheads produce the UPC-A bar code (UPC/EAN symbologies) at 100 percent size. However, an 8 dot/mm printhead produces the UPC/EAN symbologies at a magnification factor of 77 percent.

^BU supports a fixed print ratio.

Field data (^FD) is limited to exactly 11 characters. ZPL II automatically truncates or pads on the left with zeros to achieve required number of characters.

Format ^BUo,h,f,g,e
Important If additional information about the UPC-A bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: 1 to 9999 Default Value: value set by ^BY Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: Y Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: Y

h = bar code height (in dots) f = print interpretation line

g = print interpretation line above code

e = print check digit

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL Commands ^BU

The font style of the interpretation line depends on the modulus (width of narrow bar) selected in ^BY:
Note Zero is not allowed.

6 dot/mm printer: a modulus of 2 dots or greater prints with an OCR-B interpretation line; a modulus of 1 dot prints font A. 8 dot/mm printer: a modulus of 3 dots or greater prints with an OCR-B interpretation line; a modulus of 1 or 2 dots prints font A. 12 dot/mm printer: a modulus of 5 dots or greater prints with an OCR-B interpretation line; a modulus of 1, 2, 3, or 4 dots prints font A. 24 dot/mm printer: a modulus of 9 dots or greater prints with an OCR-B interpretation line; a modulus of 1 to 8 dots prints font A.
Example This is an example of a UPC-A bar code with extension:

Comments The UPC-A bar code uses the Mod 10 check digit scheme for error checking. For further information on Mod 10, see Mod 10 Check Digit on page 362.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BX

^BX
Data Matrix Bar Code
Description The ^BX command creates a two-dimensional matrix symbology made up of square modules arranged within a perimeter finder pattern. The ability to create a rectangular Datamatrix bar code is not available as a ZPL coding option. Format ^BXo,h,s,c,r,f,g This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: 1 to the width of the label The individual elements are square this parameter specifies both module and row height. If this parameter is zero (or not given), the h parameter (bar height) in ^BY is used as the approximate symbol height. Accepted Values: 0, 50, 80, 100, 140, 200 Default Value: 0 Quality refers to the amount of data that is added to the symbol for error correction. The AIM specification refers to it as the ECC value. ECC 50, ECC 80, ECC 100, and ECC 140 use convolution encoding; ECC 200 uses Reed-Solomon encoding. For new applications, ECC 200 is recommended. ECC 000-140 should be used only in closed applications where a single party controls both the production and reading of the symbols and is responsible for overall system performance.

h = dimensional height of individual symbol elements s = quality level

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

100

ZPL Commands ^BX

Parameters

Details

c = columns to encode

Accepted Values: 9 to 49 Odd values only for quality 0 to 140 (10 to 144); even values only for quality 200. Odd values only for quality 0 to 140 (10 to 144); even values only for quality 200. The number of rows and columns in the symbol is automatically determined. You might want to force the number of rows and columns to a larger value to achieve uniform symbol size. In the current implementation, quality 0 to 140 symbols are square, so the larger of the rows or columns supplied are used to force a symbol to that size. If you attempt to force the data into too small of a symbol, no symbol is printed. If a value greater than 49 is entered, the rows or columns value is set to zero and the size is determined normally. If an even value is entered, it generates INVALID-P (invalid parameter). If a value less than 9 but not 0, or if the data is too large for the forced size, no symbol prints; if ^CV is active, INVALID-L prints.

r = rows to encode f = format ID (0 to 6) not used with quality set at 200

Accepted Values: 9 to 49 Accepted Values: 1 = field data is numeric + space (0..9,) No \& 2 = field data is uppercase alphanumeric + space (A..Z,) No \& 3 = field data is uppercase alphanumeric + space, period, comma, dash, and slash (0..9,A..Z,.-/) 4 = field data is upper-case alphanumeric + space (0..9,A..Z,) no \& 5 = field data is full 128 ASCII 7-bit set 6 = field data is full 256 ISO 8-bit set Default Value: 6 Accepted Values: any character Default Value: ~ (tilde) This parameter is used only if quality 200 is specified. It is the escape character for embedding special control sequences within the field data. Note The default value of g will continue to be underscore (_) for anyone with firmware versions: V60.13.0.12, V60.13.0.12Z, V60.13.0.12B, or V60.13.0.12ZB.

g = escape sequence control character

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BX

101

Table 10 Maximum Field Sizes

ECC LEVEL 0 50 80 100 140

ID = 1 596 457 402 300 144

ID = 2 452 333 293 218 105

ID = 3 394 291 256 190 91

ID = 4 413 305 268 200 96

ID = 5 310 228 201 150 72

ID = 6 271 200 176 131 63

Maximum Field Sizes

Example This is an example of a Data Matrix bar code:

Effects of ^BY on ^BX

w = module width (no effect) r = ratio (no effect) h = height of symbol If the dimensions of individual symbol elements are not specified in the ^BD command, the height of symbol value is divided by the required rows/columns, rounded, limited to a minimum value of one, and used as the dimensions of individual symbol elements.

Field Data (^FD) for ^BX

Quality 000 to 140 The \& and || can be used to insert carriage returns, line feeds, and the backslash, similar to the PDF417. Other characters in the control character range can be inserted only by using ^FH. Field data is limited to 596 characters for quality 0 to 140. Excess field data causes no symbol to print; if ^CV is active, INVALID-L prints. The field data must correspond to a user-specified format ID or no symbol prints; if ^CV is active, INVALID-C prints. The maximum field sizes for quality 0 to 140 symbols are shown in the table in the g parameter.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

102

ZPL Commands ^BX

Quality 200 If more than 3072 bytes are supplied as field data, it is truncated to 3072 bytes. This limits the maximum size of a numeric Data Matrix symbol to less than the 3116 numeric characters that the specification would allow. The maximum alphanumeric capacity is 2335 and the maximum 8-bit byte capacity is 1556. If ^FH is used, field hexadecimal processing takes place before the escape sequence processing described below. The underscore is the default escape sequence control character for quality 200 field data. A different escape sequence control character can be selected by using parameter g in the ^BX command. The information that follows applies to these versions of firmware: V60.13.0.12, V60.13.0.12Z, V60.13.0.12B, or V60.13.0.12ZB. The input string escape sequences can be embedded in quality 200 field data using the ASCII 95 underscore character ( _ ) or the character entered in parameter g: _X is the shift character for control characters (e.g., _@=NUL,_G=BEL,_0 is PAD) _1 to _3 for FNC characters 1 to 3 (explicit FNC4, upper shift, is not allowed) FNC2 (Structured Append) must be followed by nine digits, composed of three-digit numbers with values between 1 and 254, that represent the symbol sequence and file identifier (for example, symbol 3 of 7 with file ID 1001 is represented by _2214001001) 5NNN is code page NNN where NNN is a three-digit code page value (for example, Code Page 9 is represented by _5009) _dNNN creates ASCII decimal value NNN for a code word (must be three digits) _ in data is encoded by __ (two underscores) The information that follows applies to all other versions of firmware. The input string escape sequences can be embedded in quality 200 field data using the ASCII 7E tilde character (~) or the character entered in parameter g: ~X is the shift character for control characters (e.g., ~@=NUL,~G=BEL,~0 is PAD) ~1 to ~3 for FNC characters 1 to 3 (explicit FNC4, upper shift, is not allowed) FNC2 (Structured Append) must be followed by nine digits, composed of three-digit numbers with values between 1 and 254, that represent the symbol sequence and file identifier (for example, symbol 3 of 7 with file ID 1001 is represented by ~2214001001) 5NNN is code page NNN where NNN is a three-digit code page value (for example, Code Page 9 is represented by ~5009) ~dNNN creates ASCII decimal value NNN for a code word (must be three digits) ~ in data is encoded by a ~ (tilde)

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BY

103

^BY
Bar Code Field Default
Description The ^BY command is used to change the default values for the module width (in dots), the wide bar to narrow bar width ratio and the bar code height (in dots). It can be used as often as necessary within a label format. Format ^BYw,r,h This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

w = module width (in dots) r = wide bar to narrow bar width ratio h = bar code height (in dots)

Accepted Values: 1 to 10 Initial Value at power-up: 2 Accepted Values: 2.0 to 3.0, in 0.1 increments This parameter has no effect on fixed-ratio bar codes. Default Value: 3.0 Initial Value at power-up: 10

For parameter r, the actual ratio generated is a function of the number of dots in parameter w, module width. See Table 11 on page 104.
Example Set module width (w) to 9 and the ratio (r) to 2.4. The width of the narrow bar is

9 dots wide and the wide bar is 9 by 2.4, or 21.6 dots. However, since the printer rounds out to the nearest dot, the wide bar is actually printed at 22 dots. This produces a bar code with a ratio of 2.44 (22 divided by 9). This ratio is as close to 2.4 as possible, since only full dots are printed.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

104

ZPL Commands ^BY

Module width and height (w and h) can be changed at anytime with the ^BY command, regardless of the symbology selected. Table 11 Shows module width ratios in dots
Ratio Selected (r) 1 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.0 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 3:1 2 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2.5:1 2.5:1 2.5:1 2.5:1 2.5:1 3:1 3 2:1 2:1 2:1 2.3:1 2.3:1 2.3:1 2.3:1 2.6:1 2.6:1 2.6:1 3:1 4 2:1 2:1 2:1 2.25:1 2.25:1 2.5:1 2.5:1 2.5:1 2.75:1 2.75:1 3:1 5 2:1 2:1 2.2:1 2.2:1 2.4:1 2.4:1 2.6:1 2.6:1 2.8:1 2.8:1 3:1 6 2:1 2:1 2.16:1 2.16:1 2.3:1 2.5:1 2.5:1 2.6:1 2.6:1 2.8:1 3:1 7 2:1 2:1 2.1:1 2.28:1 2.28:1 2.4:1 2.57:1 2.57:1 2.7:1 2.85:1 3:1 8 2:1 2:1 2.12:1 2.25:1 2.37:1 2.5:1 2.5:1 2.65:1 2.75:1 2.87:1 3:1 9 2:1 2:1 2.1:1 2.2:1 2.3:1 2.4:1 2.5:1 2.6:1 2.7:1 2.8:1 3:1 10 2:1 2.1:1 2.2:1 2.3:1 2.4:1 2.5:1 2.6:1 2.7:1 2.8:1 2.9:1 3:1 Module Width in Dots (w)

Comments Once a ^BY command is entered into a label format, it stays in effect until another ^BY command is encountered.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^BZ

105

^BZ
POSTNET Bar Code
Description The POSTNET bar code is used to automate the handling of mail. POSTNET uses a series of five bars, two tall and three short, to represent the digits 0 to 9.

^BZ supports a print ratio of 2.0:1 to 3.0:1.

Field data (^FD) is limited to the width (or length, if rotated) of the label.

Format ^BZo,h,f,g
Important If additional information about the POSTNET bar code is required, go to www.aimglobal.org, or contact the United States Postal Service and ask for Publication 25

Designing Letter Mail, which includes a full specification for POSTNET. You can also download Publication 25 from:
http://pe.usps.gov/cpim/ftp/pubs/pub25/pub25.pdf

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

o = orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) I = inverted 180 degrees B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees Default Value: current ^FW value Accepted Values: 1 to 32000 Default Value: value set by ^BY Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N

h = bar code height (in dots) f = print interpretation line

g = print interpretation line above code

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

106

ZPL Commands ^BZ

Example This is an example of a POSTNET bar code:

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^CC ~CC

107

^CC ~CC
Change Carets
Description The ^CC command is used to change the format command prefix. The default prefix is the caret (^). Format ^CCx or ~CCx This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

x = caret character change

Accepted Values: any ASCII character Default Value: a parameter is required. If a parameter is not entered, the next character received is the new prefix character.

Example This is an example of how to change the format prefix to / from a ::

^XA ^CC/ /XZ

The forward slash (/) is set at the new prefix. Note the /XZ ending tag uses the new designated prefix character (/).

Example This is an example of how to change the format prefix from ~ to a /:

~CC/ /XA/JUS/XZ

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

ZPL Commands ^CF

Comments Any font in the printer, including downloaded fonts, EPROM stored fonts, and fonts A through Z and 0 to 9, can also be selected with ^CW.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^CI

111

^CI
Change International Font/Encoding
Description Zebra printers can print fonts using international character sets: U.S.A.1, U.S.A.2, UK, Holland, Denmark/Norway, Sweden/Finland, Germany, France 1, France 2, Italy, Spain, and several other sets.. The ^CI command enables you to call up the international character set you want to use for printing. You can mix character sets on a label. This command allows character remapping. Any character within a font can be remapped to a different numerical position. Format ^CIa,s1,d1,s2,d2,...

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

112

ZPL Commands ^CI

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

a = desired character set

Accepted values 0 - 12 are Zebra Code Page 850 with specific character replacements. For details, see International Character Sets on page 114 and/or Zebra Code Page 850 on page 340. Accepted Values: 0 = Single Byte Encoding - U.S.A. 1 Character Set 1 = Single Byte Encoding - U.S.A. 2 Character Set 2 = Single Byte Encoding - U.K. Character Set 3 = Single Byte Encoding - Holland Character Set 4 = Single Byte Encoding - Denmark/Norway Character Set 5 = Single Byte Encoding - Sweden/Finland Character Set 6 = Single Byte Encoding - Germany Character Set 7 = Single Byte Encoding - France 1 Character Set 8 = Single Byte Encoding - France 2 Character Set 9 = Single Byte Encoding - Italy Character Set 10 = Single Byte Encoding - Spain Character Set 11 = Single Byte Encoding - Miscellaneous Character Set 12 = Single Byte Encoding - Japan (ASCII with Yen symbol) Character Set 13 = Zebra Code Page 850 (see page 340) 14 = Double Byte Asian Encodings * 15 = Shift-JIS ** 16 = EUC-JP and EUC-CN * 17 = Deprecated - UCS-2 Big Endian **** 18 to 23 = Reserved 24 = Single Byte Asian Encodings * 25 = Reserved 26 = Multibyte Asian Encodings with ASCII Transparency * and *** 27 = Zebra Code Page 1252 (see page 342) Initial Value at power-up: 0 Accepted Values: decimals 0 to 255

s1 = source 1 (character output image) d1 = destination 1 (character input) s2 = source 2 (character output image)

Accepted Values: decimals 0 to 255 Accepted Values: decimals 0 to 255

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^CI

113

Parameters

Details

d2 = destination 2 (character input)

= continuation of pattern

Accepted Values: decimals 0 to 255 Up to 256 source and destination pairs can be entered in this command.

* The encoding is controlled by the conversion table (*.DAT). The table generated by ZTools is the TrueType fonts internal encoding (Unicode). ** Shift-JIS encoding converts Shift-JIS to JIS and then looks up the JIS conversion in JIS.DAT. This table must be present for Shift-JIS to function. *** Supports ASCII transparency for Asian . 7F and less are treated as single byte characters. 80 to FE is treated as the first byte of a 2 byte character 8000 to FEFF in the encoding table for Unicode.

Example This example remaps the Euro symbol (36) decimal to the dollar sign value (21)

decimal. When the dollar sign character is sent to the printer, the Euro symbol prints. ^CI0,36,21 The font selected determines the shape and resolution of the printed symbol.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

114

ZPL Commands ^CI

International Character Sets

Note ^CI 13 = US keyboard

Comments The space character cannot be remapped for any font.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^CM

115

^CM
Change Memory Letter Designation
Description The ^CM command allows you to reassign a letter designation to the printers memory devices. If a format already exists, you can reassign the memory device to the corresponding letter without forcing, altering, or recreating the format itself. Using this command affects every subsequent command that refers to specific memory locations. Format ^CMa,b,c,d This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = memory alias for B: b = memory alias for E: c = memory alias for R: d = memory alias for A:

Accepted Values: B:, E:,R:, A:, and NONE Default Value: B: Accepted Values: B:, E:,R:, A:, and NONE Default Value: E: Accepted Values: B:, E:,R:, A:, and NONE Default Value: R: Accepted Values: B:, E:,R:, A:, and NONE Default Value: A:

Comments If two or more parameters specify the same letter designator, all letter designators are set to their default values. It is recommended that after entering the ^CM command, ^JUS is entered to save changes to EEPROM. Any duplicate parameters entered reset the letter designations back to the default. If any of the parameters are out of specification, the command is ignored.
Example This example designates letter E: to point to the B: memory device, and the

letter B: to point to the E: memory device. ^XA ^CME,B,R,A ^JUS ^XA

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

116

ZPL Commands ^CO

^CO
Cache On
Note If you have firmware x.12 or greater this command is not required because the printer

firmware automatically expands the size of the character cache as needed. Description The ^CO command is used to change the size of the character cache. By definition, a character cache (referred to as cache) is a portion of the DRAM reserved for storing scalable characters. All printers have a default 40K cache that is always turned on. The maximum single character size that can be stored, without changing the size of the cache, is 450 dots by 450 dots. There are two types of fonts used in Zebra printers: bitmapped and scalable. Letters, numbers, and symbols in a bitmapped font have a fixed size (for example: 10 points, 12 points, 14 points). By comparison, scalable fonts are not fixed in size. Because their size is fixed, bitmapped fonts can be moved quickly to the label. In contrast, scalable fonts are much slower because each character is built on an as-needed basis before it is moved to the label. By storing scaled characters in a cache, they can be recalled at a much faster speed. The number of characters that can be stored in the cache depends on two factors: the size of the cache (memory) and the size of the character (in points) being saved. The larger the point size, the more space in the cache it uses. The default cache stores every scalable character that is requested for use on a label. If the same character, with the same rotation and size is used again, it is quickly retrieved from cache. It is possible that after a while the print cache could become full. Once the cache is full, space for new characters is obtained by eliminating an existing character from the print cache. Existing characters are eliminated by determining how often they have been used. This is done automatically. For example, a 28-point Q that was used only once would be a good candidate for elimination from the cache. Maximum size of a single print cache character is 1500 dots by 1500 dots. This would require a cache of 274K. When the cache is too small for the desired style, smaller characters might appear but larger characters do not. If possible, increase the size of the cache. Format ^COa,b,c

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^CO

117

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

a = cache on

Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: Y Accepted Values: any size up to total memory available Default Value: 40

b = amount of additional memory to be added to cache (in K) c = cache type

Accepted Values: 0 = cache buffer (normal fonts) 1 = internal buffer (recommended for Asian fonts) Default Value: 0

Example To resize the print cache to 62K, assuming a 22K existing cache:

^COY,40 To resize the print cache to 100K, assuming a 22K existing cache: ^COY,78

Print Cache Performance

For printing large characters, memory added to the cache by the ^CO command is not physically added to the 22K cache already in the printer. In the second example above, the resulting 100K cache is actually two separate blocks of memory, 22K and 78K. Because large characters need contiguous blocks of memory, a character requiring a cache of 90K would not be completely stored because neither portion of the 100K cache is big enough. Therefore, if large characters are needed, the ^CO command should reflect the actual size of the cache you need. Increasing the size of the cache improves the performance in printing scalable fonts. However, the performance decreases if the size of the cache becomes large and contains too many characters. The performance gained is lost because of the time involved searching cache for each character. Comments The cache can be resized as often as needed. Any characters in the cache when it is resized are lost. Memory used for the cache reduces the space available for label bitmaps, graphic, downloaded fonts, et cetera. Some Asian fonts require an internal working buffer that is much larger than the normal cache. Since most fonts do not require this larger buffer, it is now a selectable configuration option. Printing with the Asian fonts greatly reduces the printer memory available for labels, graphics, fonts, and formats.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

ZPL Commands ^CV

Example The examples below show the error labels ^CVY generates when incorrect field data is entered. Compare the letter following INVALID to the listing on the previous page.
ZPL II CODE ^XA ^CVY ^FO50,50 ^BEN,100,Y,N ^FD97823456 890^FS ^XZ ^XA ^CVY ^FO50,50 ^BEN,100,Y,N ^FD9782345678907^FS ^XZ ^XA ^CVY ^FO50,50 ^BEN,100,Y,N ^FD97823456789081^FS ^XZ ^XA ^CVY ^FO50,50 ^BEN,100,Y,N ^FD97823456789^FS ^XZ ^XA ^CVY ^FO50,50 ^BQN2,3 ^FDHM,BQRCODE-22^FS ^XZ GENERATED LABEL

Comments If more than one error exists, the first error detected is the one displayed. The ^CV command tests the integrity of the data encoded into the bar code. It is not used for (or to be confused with) testing the scan-integrity of an image or bar code.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^CW

121

^CW
Font Identifier
Description All built-in fonts are referenced using a one-character identifier. The ^CW command assigns a single alphanumeric character to a font stored in DRAM, memory card, EPROM, or Flash. If the assigned character is the same as that of a built-in font, the downloaded font is used in place of the built-in font. The new font is printed on the label wherever the format calls for the built-in font. If used in place of a built-in font, the change is in effect only until power is turned off. If the assigned character is different, the downloaded font is used as an additional font. The assignment remains in effect until a new command is issued or the printer is turned off. Format ^CWa,d:o.x This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = letter of existing font to be substituted, or new font to be added d = device to store font in (optional) o = name of the downloaded font to be substituted for the built-in, or as an additional font x = extension

Accepted Values: A through Z and 0 to 9 Default Value: a one-character entry is required

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: R: Accepted Values: any name up to 8 characters Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used

Accepted Values:

.FNT = Font .TTF = TrueType Font

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

122

ZPL Commands ^CW

Example These examples show how to use:

MYFONT.FNT stored in DRAM whenever a format calls for Font A: ^XA ^CWA,R:MYFONT.FNT ^XZ MYFONT.FNT stored in DRAM additionally as Font Q: ^XA ^CWQ,R:MYFONT.FNT ^XZ NEWFONT.FNT stored in DRAM whenever a format calls for font F: ^XA ^CWF,R:NEWFONT.FNT ^XZ

Label Listing Before Assignment

Label Listing After Assignment

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~DB

123

~DB
Download Bitmap Font
Description The ~DB command sets the printer to receive a downloaded bitmap font and defines native cell size, baseline, space size, and copyright. This command consists of two portions, a ZPL II command defining the font and a structured data segment that defines each character of the font. Format ~DBd:o.x,a,h,w,base,space,#char,,data This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = drive to store font o = name of font x = extension a = orientation of native font h = maximum height of cell (in dots) w = maximum width of cell (in dots) base = dots from top of cell to character baseline space = width of space or non-existent characters

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: R: Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used Fixed Value: .FNT Fixed Value: normal Accepted Values: 0 to 32000 Default Value: a value must be specified Accepted Values: 0 to 32000 Default Value: a value must be specified Accepted Values: 0 to 32000 Default Value: a value must be specified

Accepted Values: 0 to 32000 Default Value: a value must be specified

#char = number of Accepted Values: 1 to 256 (must match the characters being characters in font downloaded) Default Value: a value must be specified

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

124

ZPL Commands ~DB

Parameters

Details

= copyright holder data = structured ASCII data that defines each character in the font

Accepted Values: 1 to 63 alphanumeric characters Default Value: a value must be specified The # symbol signifies character code parameters, which are separated with periods. The character code is from 1 to 4 characters to allow for large international character sets to be downloaded to the printer. The data structure is: #xxxx.h.w.x.y.i.data #xxxx = character code h = bitmap height (in dot rows) w = bitmap width (in dot rows) x = x-offset (in dots) y = y-offset (in dots) i = typesetting motion displacement (width, including inter character gap of a particular character in the font) data = hexadecimal bitmap description

Example This is an example of how to use the ~DB command. It shows the first two

characters of a font being downloaded to DRAM. ~DBR:TIMES.FNT,N,5,24,3,10,2,ZEBRA 1992, #0025.5.16.2.5.18. OOFF OOFF FFOO FFOO FFFF #0037.4.24.3.6.26. OOFFOO OFOOFO OFOOFO OOFFOO

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~DE

125

~DE
Download Encoding
Description The standard encoding for TrueType Windows fonts is always Unicode. The ZPL II field data must be converted from some other encoding to Unicode that the Zebra printer understands. The required translation tables are provided with font packs. Some tables can be downloaded from www.zebra.com. Format ~DEd:o.x,s,data This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = location of table o = name of table x = extension s = table size

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: R: Accepted Values: any valid name, up to 8 characters Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used Fixed Value: .DAT Accepted Values: the number of memory bytes required to hold the Zebra downloadable format of the font Default Value: if an incorrect value or no value is entered, the command is ignored Accepted Values: a string of ASCII hexadecimal values Default Value: if no data is entered, the command is ignored

data = data string

Example This is an example of how to download the required translation table:

~DER:JIS.DAT,27848,300021213001... (27848 two-digit hexadecimal values) Comments For more information on ZTools or ZebraNet Bridge, see the program documentation included with the software. For assistance with editing or adding mappings to .DAT tables, ZebraNet Bridge includes a .DAT table editor in the font wizard. Encoding scheme for the data sent to the printer is the second four character and the encoding scheme for the font is the first four characters throughout the .DAT file. The data must be ordered by the second four characters (the encoding table).

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

126

ZPL Commands ^DF

^DF
Download Format
Description The ^DF command saves ZPL II format commands as text strings to be later merged using ^XF with variable data. The format to be stored might contain field number (^FN) commands to be referenced when recalled. While use of stored formats reduces transmission time, no formatting time is savedthis command saves ZPL II as text strings formatted at print time. Enter the ^DF stored format command immediately after the ^XA command, then enter the format commands to be saved. Format ^DFd:o.x This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = device to store image o = image name x = extension

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: R: Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used Fixed Value: .ZPL

For a complete example of the ^DF and ^XF command, see ^DF and ^XF Download format and recall format on page 11.

Example This example is generated using the ^XF command to recall this format:

ZPL II CODE
^XA ^DFR:STOREFMT.ZPL^FS ^FO25,25 ÂD,36,20^FN1^FS ^FO165,25 ÂD,36,20^FN2^FS ^FO25,75 ÂB,22,14^FDBUILT BY^FS ^FO25,125 ÂE,28,15^FN1 ^XZ ^XA ^XFR:STOREFMT.ZPL^FS ^FN1^FDZEBRA^FS ^XZ
.

GENERATED LABEL

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~DG

127

~DG
Download Graphics
Description The ~DG command downloads an ASCII Hex representation of a graphic image. If .GRF is not the specified file extension, .GRF is automatically appended. For more saving and loading options when downloading files, see ~DY on page 134. Format ~DGd:o.x,t,w,data This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = device to store image o = image name x = extension

t = total number of bytes in graphic

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: R: Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used Fixed Value: .GRF See the formula in the examples below. See the formula in the examples below. The data string defines the image and is an ASCII hexadecimal representation of the image. Each character represents a horizontal nibble of four dots.

w = number of bytes per row data = ASCII hexadecimal string defining image

This is the key for the examples that follow: x = width of the graphic in millimeters y = height of the graphic in millimeters z = dots/mm = print density of the printer being programmed 8 = bits/byte

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

128

ZPL Commands ~DG

Examples These are some example related to the ~DG command:

To determine the t parameter use this formula:

xz ----- yz = totalbytes 8
To determine the correct t parameter for a graphic 8 mm wide, 16 mm high, and a print density of 8 dots/mm, use this formula:

8 128 = 1024 t = 1024

Raise any portion of a byte to the next whole byte. To determine the w parameter (the width in terms of bytes per row) use this formula:

w = 8
To determine the correct w parameter for a graphic 8 mm wide and a print density of 8 dots/mm, use this formula:

w = 8

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~DS

131

~DS
Download Intellifont (Scalable Font)
Description The ~DS command is used to set the printer to receive a downloadable scalable font and defines the size of the font in bytes. The ~DS command, and its associated parameters, is the result of converting a vendorsupplied font for use on a Zebra printer. To convert this font use the ZTools utility. Format ~DSd:o.x,s,data This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = device to store image o = image name x = extension s = size of font in bytes data = ASCII hexadecimal string that defines font

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: R: Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used Fixed Value: .FNT Fixed Value: this number is generated by ZTools and should not be changed Fixed Value: this number is generated by ZTools and should not be changed

Example This example shows the first three lines of a scalable font that was converted using the ZTools program and is ready to be downloaded to the printer. If necessary, the destination and object name can be changed.

~DSB:CGTIMES.FNT,37080, OOFFOOFFOOFFOOFF FFOAECB28FFFOOFF Comments Downloaded scalable fonts are not checked for integrity. If they are corrupt, they cause unpredictable results at the printer.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

132

ZPL Commands ~DT

~DT
Download Bounded TrueType Font
Description Use ZTools to convert a TrueType font to a Zebra-downloadable format. ZTools creates a downloadable file that includes a ~DT command. For information on converting and downloading Intellifont information, see ~DS on page 131. Format ~DTd:o.x,s,data This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = font location o = font name x = extension s = font size

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: R: Accepted Values: any valid TrueType name, up to 8 characters Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used Fixed Value: .DAT Accepted Values: the number of memory bytes required to hold the Zebra-downloadable format of the font Default Value: if an incorrect value or no value is entered, the command is ignored Accepted Values: a string of ASCII hexadecimal values (two hexadecimal digits/byte). The total number of two-digit values must match parameter s. Default Value: if no data is entered, the command is ignored

data = data string

Example This is an example of how to download a true type font:

~DTR:FONT,52010,00AF01B0C65E... (52010 two-digit hexadecimal values)

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~DU

133

~DU
Download Unbounded TrueType Font
Description Some international fonts, such as Asian fonts, have more than 256 printable characters. These fonts are supported as large TrueType fonts and are downloaded to the printer with the ~DU command. Use ZTools to convert the large TrueType fonts to a Zebra-downloadable format. The Field Block (^FB) command cannot support the large TrueType fonts. Format ~DUd:o.x,s,data This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = font location o = font name x = extension

s = font size

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: R: Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used Fixed Value: .FNT Accepted Values: the number of memory bytes required to hold the Zebra-downloadable format of the font Default Value: if no data is entered, the command is ignored Accepted Values: a string of ASCII hexadecimal values (two hexadecimal digits/byte). The total number of two-digit values must match parameter s. Default Value: if no data is entered, the command is ignored

data = data string

Example This is an example of how to download an unbounded true type font:

~DUR:KANJI,86753,60CA017B0CE7... (86753 two-digit hexadecimal values) For similar commands, see ~DS on page 131, ~DT on page 132, and ~DY on page 134.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

134

ZPL Commands ~DY

~DY
Download Graphics / Native TrueType or OpenType Font
Description The ~DY command downloads to the printer graphic objects or fonts in any supported format. This command can be used in place of ~DG for more saving and loading options. ~DY is the preferred command to download TrueType fonts on printers with firmware greater than X.13. It is faster than ~DU. Format ~DYd:f,b,x,t,w,data This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = file location f = file name b = format downloaded in data field

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: R: Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used Accepted Values: A = uncompressed (ZB64, ASCII) B = uncompressed (binary) C = AR-compressed (used only by Zebras BAR-ONE v5) P = portable network graphic (.PNG) - ZB64 encoded Default Value: a value must be specified Accepted Values: B = bitmap G = raw bitmap (.GRF) P = store as compressed (.PNG) T = TrueType (.TTF) or X = Paintbrush (.PCX) Default Value: a value other than the accepted values defaults to .GRF

x = extension of stored file

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~DY

135

Parameters

Details

t = total number of bytes in file

Accepted Values: .BMP This parameter refers to the actual size of the file, not the amount of disk space. .GRF images: the size after decompression into memory This parameter refers to the actual size of the file, not the amount of disk space. .PCX This parameter refers to the actual size of the file, not the amount of disk space. .PNG images: This parameter refers to the actual size of the file, not the amount of disk space. .TTF This parameter refers to the actual size of the file, not the amount of disk space. Accepted Values: .GRF images: number of bytes per row

w = total number of bytes per row

.PNG images: value ignored

.TTF images: value ignored

data = data

ASCII hexadecimal encoding, ZB64, or binary data, depending on b. A, P = ASCII hexadecimal or ZB64 B, C = binary When binary data is sent, all control prefixes and flow control characters are ignored until the total number of bytes needed for the graphic format is received.

Note The ~DY command and the binary font file can be sent as two separate files. If the files

are sent to the printer separately, the data light might remain lit until the printer receives the TrueType font file. SIZE number of bytes must be received for the download to complete successfully.
Example This is an example of how to download a binary TrueType Font file of Size bytes

using the name fontfile.ttf and storing it to permanent flash memory on the printer: ~DYE:FONTFILE.TTF,B,T,SIZE,, Comments For more information on ZB64 encoding and compression, see ZB64 Encoding and Compression on page 365.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

136

ZPL Commands ~EG

~EG
Erase Download Graphics
See ^ID on page 180.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^FB

137

^FB
Field Block
Description The ^FB command allows you to print text into a defined block type format. This command formats an ^FD or ^SN string into a block of text using the origin, font, and rotation specified for the text string. The ^FB command also contains an automatic word-wrap function. Format ^FBa,b,c,d,e This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = width of text block line (in dots) b = maximum number of lines in text block

Accepted Values: 0 to the width of the label Default Value: 0 If the value is less than font width or not specified, text does not print. Accepted Values: 1 to 9999 Default Value: 1 Text exceeding the maximum number of lines overwrites the last line. Changing the font size automatically increases or decreases the size of the block. Accepted Values: -9999 to 9999 Default Value: 0 Numbers are considered to be positive unless preceded by a minus sign. Positive values add space; negative values delete space. Accepted Values: L = left C = center R = right J = justified Default Value: L If J is used the last line is left-justified. Accepted Values: 0 to 9999 Default Value: 0

c = add or delete space between lines (in dots)

d = text justification

e = hanging indent (in dots) of the second and remaining lines

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

138

ZPL Commands ^FB

Example These are examples of how the ^FB command affects field data.

Comments on the ^FB Command

This scheme can be used to facilitate special functions: \& = carriage return/line feed $*) = soft hyphen (word break with a dash) \\ = backslash ($ Item 1: ^CI13 must be selected to print a backslash (\). Item 2: If a soft hyphen escape sequence is placed near the end of a line, the hyphen is printed. If it is not placed near the end of the line, it is ignored. (*) = any alphanumeric character If a word is too long to print on one line by itself (and no soft hyphen is specified), a hyphen is automatically placed in the word at the right edge of the block. The remainder of the word is on the next line. The position of the hyphen depends on word length, not a syllable boundary. Use a soft hyphen within a word to control where the hyphenation occurs. Maximum data-string length is 3K, including control characters, carriage returns, and line feeds. Normal carriage returns, line feeds, and word spaces at line breaks are discarded. When using ^FT (Field Typeset), ^FT uses the baseline origin of the last possible line of text. Increasing the font size causes the text block to increase in size from bottom to top. This could cause a label to print past its top margin. When using ^FO (Field Origin), increasing the font size causes the text block to increase in size from top to bottom. ^FS terminates an ^FB command. Each block requires its own ^FB command.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^FC

139

^FC
Field Clock (for Real-Time Clock)
Description The ^FC command is used to set the clock-indicators (delimiters) and the clock mode for use with the Real-Time Clock hardware. This command must be included within each label field command string each time the Real-Time Clock values are required within the field. Format ^FCa,b,c This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = primary clock indicator character b = secondary clock indicator character c = third clock indicator character

Accepted Values: any ASCII character Default Value: % Accepted Values: any ASCII character Default Value: nonethis value cannot be the same as a or c Accepted Values: any ASCII character Default Value: nonethis value cannot be the same as a or b

Example Entering these ZPL commands sets the primary clock indicator to %, the

secondary clock indicator to {, and the third clock indicator to #. The results are printed on a label with Primary, Secondary, and Third as field data.
ZPL II CODE ^XA ^FO10,100Â0N,50,50 ^FC%,{,# ^FDPrimary: %m/%d/%y^FS ^FO10,200Â0N,50,50 ^FC%,{,# ^FDSecondary: {m/{d/{y^FS ^FO10,300Â0N,50,50 ^FC%,{,# ^FDThird: #m/#d/#y^FS ^XZ GENERATED LABEL

Comments The ^FC command is ignored if the Real-Time Clock hardware is not present. For more details on the Real Time Clock, see the Zebra Real Time Clock Guide.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

140

ZPL Commands ^FD

^FD
Field Data
Description The ^FD command defines the data string for the field. The field data can be any printable character except those used as command prefixes (^ and ~). Format ^FDa This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = data to be printed Accepted Values: any data string up to 3072 bytes Default Value: nonea string of characters must be entered
Comments The ^ and ~ characters can be printed by changing the prefix characterssee ^CD ~CD on page 108 and ^CT ~CT on page 118. The new prefix characters cannot be printed. Characters with codes above 127, or the ^ and ~ characters, can be printed using the ^FH and ^FD commands. ^CI13 must be selected to print a backslash (\).

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^FH

141

^FH
Field Hexadecimal Indicator
Description The ^FH command allows you to enter the hexadecimal value for any character directly into the ^FD statement. The ^FH command must precede each ^FD command that uses hexadecimals in its field. Within the ^FD statement, the hexadecimal indicator must precede each hexadecimal value. The default hexadecimal indicator is _ (underscore). There must be a minimum of two characters designated to follow the underscore. The a parameter can be added when a different hexadecimal indicator is needed. This command can be used with any of the commands that have field data (that is ^FD, ^FV (Field Variable), and ^SN (Serialized Data)). Valid hexadecimal characters are: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F a b c d e f Format ^FHa This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = hexadecimal indicator

Accepted Values: any character except current format and control prefix (^ and ~ by default) Default Value: _ (underscore)

Example This is an example of how to enter a hexadecimal value directly into a ^FD statement: This is an example for ascii data using ^CI0.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

142

ZPL Commands ^FM

^FM
Multiple Field Origin Locations
Description The ^FM command allows you to control the placement of bar code symbols. It designates field locations for the PDF417 (^B7) and Micro-PDF417 (^BF) bar codes when the structured append capabilities are used. This allows printing multiple bar codes from the same set of text information. The structured append capability is a way of extending the text printing capacity of both bar codes. If a string extends beyond what the data limitations of the bar code are, it can be printed as a series: 1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3. Scanners read the information and reconcile it into the original, unsegmented text. The ^FM command triggers multiple bar code printing on the same label with ^B7 and ^BF only. When used with any other commands, it is ignored. Format ^FMx1,y1,x2,y2,... This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

x1 = x-axis location of first symbol (in dots)

Accepted Values: 0 to 32000 e = exclude this bar code from printing Default Value: a value must be specified Accepted Values: 0 to 32000 e = exclude this bar code from printing Default Value: a value must be specified Accepted Values: 0 to 32000 e = exclude this bar code from printing Default Value: a value must be specified Accepted Values: 0 to 32000 e = exclude this bar code from printing Default Value: a value must be specified Maximum number of pairs: 60

y1 = y-axis location of first symbol (in dots)

x2 = x-axis location of second symbol (in dots)

y2 = y-axis location of second symbol (in dots)

= continuation of X,Y pairs

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^FM

143

Example This example shows you how to generate three bar codes with the text Zebra

Technologies Corporation strives to be would need to be repeated seven times, which includes 2870 characters of data (including spaces) between ^FD and ^FS:
ZPL II CODE
^XA ^FM100,100,100,600,100,1200 ^BY2,3 ^B7N,5,5,9,83,N ^FDZebra Technologies Corporation strives to be the expert supplier of innovative solutions to specialty demand labeling and ticketing problems of business and government. We will attract and retain the best people who will understand our customer's needs and provide them with systems, hardware, software, consumables and service offering the best value, high quality, and reliable performance, all delivered in a timely manner ^FS^XZ

GENERATED LABEL

The ellipse is not part of the code. It indicates that the text needs to be repeated seven times, as mentioned in the example description.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

144

ZPL Commands ^FM

Example This example assumes a maximum of three bar codes, with bar code 2 of 3

omitted:
ZPL II CODE
^XA ^FM100,100,e,e,100,1200 ^BY2,3 ^B7N,5,5,9,83,N ^FDZebra Technologies Corporation strives to be the expert supplier of innovative solutions to specialty demand labeling and ticketing problems of business and government. We will attract and retain the best people who will understand our customer's needs and provide them with systems, hardware, software, consumables and service offering the best value, high quality, and reliable performance, all delivered in a timely manner ^FS^XZ

GENERATED LABEL

The ellipse is not part of the code. It indicates that the text needs to be repeated seven times, as mentioned in the example description.

Comments Subsequent bar codes print once the data limitations of the previous bar code have been exceeded. For example, bar code 2 of 3 prints once 1 of 3 has reached the maximum amount of data it can hold. Specifying three fields does not ensure that three bar codes print; enough field data to fill three bar code fields has to be provided. The number of the x,y pairs can exceed the number of bar codes generated. However, if too few are designated, no symbols print.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^FN

145

^FN
Field Number
Description The ^FN command numbers the data fields. This command is used in both ^DF (Store Format) and ^XF (Recall Format) commands. In a stored format, use the ^FN command where you would normally use the ^FD (Field Data) command. In recalling the stored format, use ^FN in conjunction with the ^FD command. The number of fields and data that can be stored is dependent in the available printer memory.
Note The maximum number of ^FN commands that can be used depends on the amount of data that is placed in the fields on the label. It is recommended to use 400 or fewer fields.

Format ^FN# This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

# = number to be assigned to the field

Accepted Values: 0 to 9999 Default Value: 0

For a complete example of the ^DF and ^XF command, see ^DF and ^XF Download format and recall format on page 11. Comments The same ^FN value can be stored with several different fields. If a label format contains a field with ^FN and ^FD, the data in that field prints for any other field containing the same ^FN value.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

146

ZPL Commands ^FO

^FO
Field Origin
Description The ^FO command sets a field origin, relative to the label home (^LH) position. ^FO sets the upper-left corner of the field area by defining points along the x-axis and y-axis independent of the rotation. Format ^FOx,y This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

x = x-axis location (in dots) y = y-axis location (in dots)

Accepted Values: 0 to 32000 Default Value: 0 Accepted Values: 0 to 32000 Default Value: 0

Comments If the value entered for the x or y parameter is too high, it could position the field origin completely off the label.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^FP

147

^FP
Field Parameter
Description The ^FP command allows vertical and reverse formatting of the font field, commonly used for printing Asian fonts. Format ^FPd,g This table identifies the parameters for this format:
.

Parameters

Details

d = direction

Accepted Values: H = horizontal printing (left to right) V = vertical printing (top to bottom) R = reverse printing (right to left) Default Value: H Accepted Values: 0 to 9999 Default Value: 0 if no value is entered

g = additional inter-character gap (in dots)

Example This is an example of how to implement reverse and vertical print:

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

148

ZPL Commands ^FR

^FR
Field Reverse Print
Description The ^FR command allows a field to appear as white over black or black over white. When printing a field and the ^FR command has been used, the color of the output is the reverse of its background. Format ^FR
Example In this example, the ^GB command creates areas of black allowing the printing to

appear white:
ZPL II CODE ^XA ^PR1 ^FO100,100 ^GB70,70,70,,3^FS ^FO200,100 ^GB70,70,70,,3^FS ^FO300,100 ^GB70,70,70,,3^FS ^FO400,100 ^GB70,70,70,,3^FS ^FO107,110^CF0,70,93 ^FR^FDREVERSE^FS ^XZ GENERATED LABEL

Comments The ^FR command applies to only one field and has to be specified each time. When multiple ^FR commands are going to be used, it might be more convenient to use the ^LR command.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^FS

149

^FS
Field Separator
Description The ^FS command denotes the end of the field definition. Alternatively, ^FS command can also be issued as a single ASCII control code SI (Control-O, hexadecimal 0F). Format ^FS

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

150

ZPL Commands ^FT

^FT
Field Typeset
Description The ^FT command sets the field position, relative to the home position of the label designated by the ^LH command. The typesetting origin of the field is fixed with respect to the contents of the field and does not change with rotation.

Note The ^FT command is capable of concantination of fields.

Format ^FTx,y This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

x = x-axis location (in dots) y = y-axis location (in dots)

Accepted Values: 0 to 32000 Default Value: position after last formatted text field Accepted Values: 0 to 32000 Default Value: position after last formatted text field Table 12 Typeset Justification

Text
Left Justified

For examples, see Field Interactions on page 371. Origin is base of bar code, at left edge Origin is bottom-left corner of the box Origin is bottom-left corner of the image area

Bar Codes Graphic Boxes Images

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

Example This example shows how ^FW rotation works in conjunction with ^FO. In this

example note that: the fields using A0N print the field in normal rotation the fields with no rotation indicated (A0) follow the rotation used in the ^FW command (^FWR).
ZPL II CODE
^XA ^FWR ^FO150,100Â0N,70,60^FDZebra Technologies^FS ^FO50,75Â0,70,60^FD0123456789^FS ^FO150,200Â0N,70,60^FD333 Corporate Woods Parkway^FS ^FO900,75Â0,70,60^FDXXXXXXXXX^FS ^XZ

GENERATED LABEL

Comments ^FW affects only the orientation in commands where the rotation parameter has not been specifically set. If a command has a specific rotation parameter, that value is used.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

154

ZPL Commands ^FX

^FX
Comment
Description The ^FX command is useful when you want to add non-printing informational comments or statements within a label format. Any data after the ^FX command up to the next caret (^) or tilde (~) command does not have any effect on the label format. Therefore, you should avoid using the caret (^) or tilde (~) commands within the ^FX statement. Format ^FXc This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

c = non printing comment

Creates a non-printable comment.

Example This is an example of how to use the ^FX command effectively:

ZPL II CODE ^XA ^LH100,100^FS ^FXSHIPPING LABEL^FS ^FO10,10^GB470,280,4^FS ^FO10,190^GB470,4,4^FS ^FO10,80^GB240,2,2^FS ^FO250,10^GB2,100,2^FS ^FO250,110^GB226,2,2^FS ^FO250,60^GB226,2,2^FS ^FO156,190^GB2,95,2^FS ^FO312,190^GB2,95,2^FS ^XZ

GENERATED LABEL

Comments Correct usage of the ^FX command includes following it with the ^FS command.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^GB

155

^GB
Graphic Box
Description The ^GB command is used to draw boxes and lines as part of a label format. Boxes and lines are used to highlight important information, divide labels into distinct areas, or to improve the appearance of a label. The same format command is used for drawing either boxes or lines. Format ^GBw,h,t,c,r This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

w = box width (in dots) h = box height (in dots) t = border thickness (in dots) c = line color

Accepted Values: value of t to 32000 Default Value: value used for thickness (t) or 1 Accepted Values: value of t to 32000 Default Value: value used for thickness (t) or 1 Accepted Values: 1 to 32000 Default Value: 1 Accepted Values:

B = black W = white Default Value: B r = degree of corner- Accepted Values: 0 (no rounding) to 8 (heaviest rounding) rounding Default Value: 0
For the w and h parameters, keep in mind that printers have a default of 6, 8, 12, or 24 dots/millimeter. This comes out to 153, 203, 300, or 600 dots per inch. To determine the values for w and h, calculate the dimensions in millimeters and multiply by 6, 8, 12, or 24. If the width and height are not specified, you get a solid box with its width and height as specified by value t. The roundness-index is used to determine a rounding-radius for each box. Formula: rounding-radius = (rounding-index / 8) * (shorter side / 2) where the shorter side is the lesser of the width and height (after adjusting for minimum and default values).

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

156

ZPL Commands ^GB

Examples Here are a few examples of graphic boxes:

Width: 1.5 inch; Height: 1 inch; Thickness: 10; Color: default; Rounding: default

Width: 0 inch; Height: 1 inch; Thickness: 20; Color: default; Rounding: default:

Width: 1 inch; Height: 0 inch; Thickness: 30; Color: default; Rounding: default

Width: 1.5 inch; Height: 1 inch; Thickness: 10; Color: default; Rounding: 5

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^GC

157

^GC
Graphic Circle
Description The ^GC command produces a circle on the printed label. The command parameters specify the diameter (width) of the circle, outline thickness, and color. Thickness extends inward from the outline. Format ^GCd,t,c This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = circle diameter (in dots) t = border thickness (in dots) c = line color

Accepted Values: 3 to 4095 (larger values are replaced with 4095) Default Value: 3 Accepted Values: 2 to 4095 Default Value: 1 Accepted Values:

B = black W = white Default Value: B

Example This is an example of how to create a circle on the printed label:

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

158

ZPL Commands ^GD

^GD
Graphic Diagonal Line
Description The ^GD command produces a straight diagonal line on a label. This can be used in conjunction with other graphic commands to create a more complex figure. Format ^GDw,h,t,c,o This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

w = box width (in dots) h = box height (in dots) t = border thickness (in dots) c = line color

Accepted Values: 3 to 32000 Default Value: value of t (thickness) or 1 Accepted Values: 3 to 32000 Default Value: value of t (thickness) or 1 Accepted Values: 1 to 32000 Default Value: 1 Accepted Values: B = black W = white Default Value: B

o = orientation (direction of the diagonal)

Accepted Values: R (or /) = right-leaning diagonal L (or \) = left-leaning diagonal Default Value: R

Example This is an example of how to create a diagonal line connecting one corner with the

opposite corner of a box on a printed label:

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^GE

159

^GE
Graphic Ellipse
Description The ^GE command produces an ellipse in the label format. Format ^GEw,h,t,c This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

w = ellipse width (in dots) h = ellipse height (in dots) t = border thickness (in dots) c = line color

Accepted Values: 3 to 4095 (larger values are replaced with 4095) Default Value: value used for thickness (t) or 1 Accepted Values: 3 to 4095 Default Value: value used for thickness (t) or 1 Accepted Values: 2 to 4095 Default Value: 1 Accepted Values: B = black W = white Default Value: B

Example This is an example of how to create a ellipse on a printed label:

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

160

ZPL Commands ^GF

^GF
Graphic Field
Description The ^GF command allows you to download graphic field data directly into the printers bitmap storage area. This command follows the conventions for any other field, meaning a field orientation is included. The graphic field data can be placed at any location within the bitmap space. Format ^GFa,b,c,d,data This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = compression type Accepted Values: A = ASCII hexadecimal (follows the format for other download commands) B = binary (data sent after the c parameter is strictly binary) C = compressed binary (data sent after the c parameter is in compressed binary format. The data is compressed on the host side using Zebras compression algorithm. The data is then decompressed and placed directly into the bitmap.) Default Value: A b = binary byte count Accepted Values: 1 to 99999 This is the total number of bytes to be transmitted for the total image or the total number of bytes that follow parameter d. For ASCII download, the parameter should match parameter c. Out-of-range values are set to the nearest limit. Default Value: command is ignored if a value is not specified c = graphic field count
Accepted Values: 1 to 99999 This is the total number of bytes comprising the graphic format (width x height), which is sent as parameter d. Count divided by bytes per row gives the number of lines in the image. This number represents the size of the image, not necessarily the size of the data stream (see d). Default Value: command is ignored if a value is not specified

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^GF

161

Parameters

Details

d = bytes per row

Accepted Values: 1 to 99999 This is the number of bytes in the downloaded data that comprise one row of the image. Default Value: command is ignored if a value is not specified Accepted Values: ASCII hexadecimal data: 00 to FF A string of ASCII hexadecimal numbers, two digits per image byte. CR and LF can be inserted as needed for readability. The number of two-digit number pairs must match the above count. Any numbers sent after count is satisfied are ignored. A comma in the data pads the current line with 00 (white space), minimizing the data sent. ~DN or any caret or tilde character prematurely aborts the download. Binary data: Strictly binary data is sent from the host. All control prefixes are ignored until the total number of bytes needed for the graphic format is sent.

data = data

Example This example downloads 8,000 total bytes of data and places the graphic data at location 100,100 of the bitmap. The data sent to the printer is in ASCII form.

^FO100,100^GFA,8000,8000,80,ASCII data

Example This example downloads 8,000 total bytes of data and places the graphic data at location 100,100 of the bitmap. The data sent to the printer is in binary form.

^FO100,100^GFB,8000,8000,80,Binary data

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

162

ZPL Commands ^GS

^GS
Graphic Symbol
Description The ^GS command enables you to generate the registered trademark, copyright symbol, and other symbols. Format ^GSo,h,w This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

o = field orientation

Accepted Values: N = normal R = rotate 90 degrees clockwise I = inverted 180 degrees B = bottom-up, 270 degrees Default Value: N or last ^FW value Accepted Values: 0 to 32000 Default Value: last ^CF value Accepted Values: 0 to 32000 Default Value: last ^CF value

h = character height proportional to width (in dots) w = character width proportional to height (in dots)

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^GS

163

Example Use the ^GS command followed by ^FD and the appropriate character (A

through E) within the field data to generate the desired character:

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

164

ZPL Commands ~HB

~HB
Battery Status
Description When the ~HB command is sent to the printer, a data string is sent back to the host. The string starts with an <STX> control code sequence and terminates by an <ETX><CR><LF> control code sequence.

Important This command only responds to mobile printers.

Format ~HB Parameters: when the printer receives the command, it returns: <STX>bb.bb,hh.hh,bt<ETX><CR><LF> <STX> bb.bb hh.hh bt <ETX> <CR> <LF> = = = = = = = ASCII start-of-text character current battery voltage reading to the nearest 1/4 volt current head voltage reading to the nearest 1/4 volt battery temperature in Celsius ASCII end-of-text character ASCII carriage return ASCII line feed character

Comments This command is used for the power-supply battery of the printer and should not be confused with the battery backed-up RAM.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~HD

165

~HD
Head Diagnostic
Description The ~HD command echoes printer status information that includes the power supply and head temperature using the terminal emulator. Format ~HD
Example This is an example of the ~HD command:

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

166

ZPL Commands ^HF

^HF
Host Format
Description The ^HF command sends stored formats to the host. Format ^HFd,o,x This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = device to recall image o = image name x = extension

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: R: Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used Fixed Value: .ZPL

Example This example shows the sequence and results.

Using a terminal emulator, you download this code to the printer: ^XA ^DFB:FILE1.ZPL ^FO100,100^A0,100 ^FDTEST^FS ^XZ Then you send this code to the printer:

^XA ^HFB:FILE1.ZPL ^XZ

The terminal emulator returns this code: ^XA^DFFILE1, ^FO100,100^A0,100^FDTEST^FS ^XZ

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^HG

167

^HG
Host Graphic
Description The ^HG command is used to upload graphics to the host. The graphic image can be stored for future use, or it can be downloaded to any Zebra printer. Format ^HGd:o.x This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = device location of object o = object name x = extension

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: search priority Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used Fixed Value: .GRF

Comments For more information on uploading graphics, see ^HY on page 177.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

168

ZPL Commands ^HH

^HH
Configuration Label Return
Description The ^HH command echoes printer configuration back to the host, using a terminal emulator. Format ^HH
Example This is an example of the ^HH command:

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~HI

169

~HI
Host Identification
Description The ~HI command is designed to be sent from the host to the Zebra printer to retrieve information. Upon receipt, the printer responds with information on the model, software version, dots-per-millimeter setting, memory size, and any detected objects. Format ~HI When the printer receives this command, it returns: XXXXXX,V1.0.0,dpm,000KB,X XXXXXX = model of Zebra printer V1.0.0 = version of software dpm = dots/mm 6, 8, 12, or 24 dots/mm printheads 000KB = memory 512KB = 1/2 MB 1024KB = 1 MB 2048KB = 2 MB 4096KB = 4 MB 8192KB = 8 MB x = recognizable objects only options specific to printer are shown (cutter, options, et cetera.)

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

170

ZPL Commands ~HM

~HM
Host RAM Status
Description Sending ~HM to the printer immediately returns a memory status message to the host. Use this command whenever you need to know the printers RAM status. When ~HM is sent to the Zebra printer, a line of data containing information on the total amount, maximum amount, and available amount of memory is sent back to the host. Format ~HM
Example This example shows when the ~HM is sent to the printer, a line of data containing

three numbers are sent back to the host. Each set of numbers is identified and explained in the table that follows:
2 1

3584,3586,3586

1 2 3

The total amount of RAM (in kilobytes) installed in the printer. In this example, the printer has 1024K RAM installed. The maximum amount of RAM (in kilobytes) available to the user. In this example, the printer has a maximum of 780K RAM available. The amount of RAM (in kilobytes) currently available to the user. In this example, there is 780K of RAM in the printer currently available to the user.

Comments Memory taken up by bitmaps is included in the currently available memory value (due to ^MCN). Downloading a graphic image, fonts, or saving a bitmap affects only the amount of RAM. The total amount of RAM and maximum amount of RAM does not change after the printer is turned on.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~HS

171

~HS
Host Status Return
Description When the host sends ~HS to the printer, the printer sends three data strings back. Each string starts with an <STX> control code and is terminated by an <ETX><CR><LF> control code sequence. To avoid confusion, the host prints each string on a separate line. String 1 <STX>aaa,b,c,dddd,eee,f,g,h,iii,j,k,l<ETX><CR><LF> aaa b c dddd eee f g h iii j k l = = = = = = = = = = = = communication (interface) settings* paper out flag (1 = paper out) pause flag (1 = pause active) label length (value in number of dots) number of formats in receive buffer buffer full flag (1 = receive buffer full) communications diagnostic mode flag (1 = diagnostic mode active) partial format flag (1 = partial format in progress) unused (always 000) corrupt RAM flag (1 = configuration data lost) temperature range (1 = under temperature) temperature range (1 = over temperature)

* This string specifies the printers baud rate, number of data bits, number of stop bits, parity setting, and type of handshaking. This value is a three-digit decimal representation of an eightbit binary number. To evaluate this parameter, first convert the decimal number to a binary number. The nine-digit binary number is read according to this table:
aaa = a8 a7 a6 a5 a 4 a3 a2 a1 a0 a 7 = Handshake 0 = Xon/Xoff 1 = DTR a = Parity Odd/Even 0 = Odd 1 = Even a 5 = Disable/Enable 0 = Disable 1 = Enable a 4 = Stop Bits 0 = 2 Bits 1 = 1 Bit a 3 = Data Bits 0 = 7 Bits 1 = 8 Bits
6

a 8 a 2 a 1 a 0 = Baud 0 000 = 110 0 001 = 300 0 010 = 600 0 011 = 1200 0 100 = 2400 0 101 = 4800 0 110 = 9600 0 111 = 19200 1 000 = 28800 (available only on certain printer models) 1 001 = 38400 (available only on certain printer models) 1 010 = 57600 (available only on certain printer models) 1 011 = 14400

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

172

ZPL Commands ~HS

String 2 <STX>mmm,n,o,p,q,r,s,t,uuuuuuuu,v,www<ETX><CR><LF> mmm n o p q r = = = = = = function settings* unused head up flag (1 = head in up position) ribbon out flag (1 = ribbon out) thermal transfer mode flag (1 = Thermal Transfer Mode selected) Print Mode 0 = Rewind 1 = Peel-Off 2 = Tear-Off 3 = Cutter 4 = Applicator print width mode label waiting flag (1 = label waiting in Peel-off Mode) labels remaining in batch format while printing flag (always 1) number of graphic images stored in memory

s t uuuuuu uu v www

= = = = =

* This string specifies the printers media type, sensor profile status, and communication diagnostics status. As in String 1, this is a three-digit decimal representation of an eight-bit binary number. First, convert the decimal number to a binary number. The eight-digit binary number is read according to this table:
mmm = m7 m6 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0 m7 = Media Type 0 = Die-Cut 1 = Continuous m6 = Sensor Profile 0 = Off m4 m3 m2 m1 = Unused 0 = Off 1 = On m0 = Print Mode 0 = Direct Thermal 1 = Thermal Transfer

m5 = Communications Diagnostics 0 = Off 1 = On

String 3 <STX>xxxx,y<ETX><CR><LF>

xxxx y

= =

password 0 (static RAM not installed) 1 (static RAM installed)

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~HU

173

~HU
Return ZebraNet Alert Configuration
Description This command returns the table of configured ZebraNet Alert settings to the host. Format ~HU
Example If the ~HU command is sent to the printer with existing Alert messages set to go

to e-mail and SNMP traps, the data returned would look something like the information below. See ^SX on page 269 for complete information on the individual parameter settings. B,C,Y,Y,[email protected],0 J,F,Y,Y,,0 C,F,Y,Y,,0 D,F,Y,Y,,0 E,F,Y,N,,0 F,F,Y,N,,0 H,C,Y,N,[email protected],0 N,C,Y,Y,[email protected],0 O,C,Y,Y,[email protected],0 P,C,Y,Y,[email protected],0 The first line indicates that condition B (ribbon out) is routed to destination C (e-mail address). The next two characters, Y and Y, indicate that the condition set and condition clear options have been set to yes. The following entry is the destination that the Alert e-mail should be sent to; in this example it is [email protected]. The last figure seen in the first line is 0, which is the port number. Each line shows the settings for a different Alert condition as defined in the ^SX command.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

174

ZPL Commands ^HV

^HV
Host Verification
Description This command is used to return data from specified fields, along with an optional ASCII header, to the host computer. The command can be used with any field that has been assigned a number with the ^RT command or the ^FN and ^RF commands. Format ^HV#,n,h This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

# = field number specified with another command n = number of bytes to be returned h = header

The value assigned to this parameter should be the same as the one used in another command. Accepted Values: 0 to 9999 Default Value: 0 Accepted Values: 1 to 256 Default Value: 64 Header to be returned with the data. Accepted Values: 0 to 3072 bytes Default Value: no header

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^HW

175

^HW
Host Directory List
Description ^HW is used to transmit a directory listing of objects in a specific memory area (storage device) back to the host device. This command returns a formatted ASCII string of object names to the host. Each object is listed on a line and has a fixed length. The total length of a line is also fixed. Each line listing an object begins with the asterisk (*) followed by a blank space. There are eight spaces for the object name, followed by a period and three spaces for the extension. The extension is followed by two blank spaces, six spaces for the object size, two blank spaces, and three spaces for option flags (reserved for future use). The format looks like this: <STX><CR><LF> DIR R: <CR><LF> *Name.ext(2sp.)(6 obj. sz.)(2sp.)(3 option flags) *Name.ext(2sp.)(6 obj. sz.)(2sp.)(3 option flags) <CR><LF> -xxxxxxx bytes free <CR><LF> <ETX> <STX> = start of text <CR><LR> = carriage return/line feed <ETX> = end on text The command might be used in a stand-alone file to be issued to the printer at any time. The printer returns the directory listing as soon as possible, based on other tasks it might be performing when the command is received. This command, like all ^ (caret) commands, is processed in the order that it is received by the printer. Format ^HWd:o.x This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = location to retrieve object listing o = object name x = extension

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, A:and Z: Default Value: R: Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters Default Value: asterisk (*). A question mark (?) can also be used. Accepted Values: any extension conforming to Zebra conventions Default Value: asterisk (*). A question mark (?) can also be used.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

176

ZPL Commands ^HW

Example Listed is an example of the ^HW command to retrieve from information R:

^XA ^HWR:. ^XZ

Example The printer returned this information as the Host Directory Listing:-DIR

R:*.* *R:ARIALN1.FNT 49140 *R:ARIALN2.FNT 49140 *R:ARIALN3.FNT 49140 *R:ARIALN4.FNT 49140 *R:ARIALN.FNT 49140 *R:ZEBRA.GRF 8420 -794292 bytes free R:RAM

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^HY

177

^HY
Upload Graphics
Description The ^HY command is an extension of the ^HG command. ^HY is used to upload graphic objects from the printer in any supported format. Format ^HYd:o.x This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = location of object o = object name x = extension

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: search priority Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters Default Value: an object name must be specified Accepted Values: G = .GRF (raw bitmap format) P = .PNG (compressed bitmap format) Default Value: format of stored image

Comments The image is uploaded in the form of a ~DY command. The data field of the returned ~DY command is always encoded in the ZB64 format.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

178

ZPL Commands ^HZ

^HZ
Display Description Information
Description The ^HZ command is used for returning printer description information in XML format. The printer returns information on format parameters, object directories, individual object data, and print status information. Format ^HZb This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

b = display description to return

Accepted Values: a = display all information f = display printer format setting information l = display object directory listing information o = display individual object data information r = display printer status information Default Value: if the value is missing or invalid, the command is ignored

Format ^HZO,d:o.x,l This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = location of stored object

o = object name

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: R: Accepted Values: 1 to 8, or 1 to 16 alphanumeric characters based on parameter l. Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^HZ

179

Parameters

Details

x = extension

Supported extensions for objects (parameter o) include: .FNT font .GRF graphic .PNG compressed graphic .ZPL stored format .DAT encoding table .ZOB downloadable object .STO Alert data file Accepted Values: Y = Yes If Y, the object data stores the filename as 16 characters. The data is only compatible with firmware V60.13.0.5 and above. N = No If N, the object data stores the filename as 8 characters. The data is forward and backward compatible with all versions of firmware. Default Value: N

l = long filename support

Example This example shows the object data information for the object SAMPLE.GRF located on R:.

^XA ^HZO,R:SAMPLE.GRF ^XZ

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

180

ZPL Commands ^ID

ÎD
Object Delete
Description The ÎD command deletes objects, graphics, fonts, and stored formats from storage areas. Objects can be deleted selectively or in groups. This command can be used within a printing format to delete objects before saving new ones, or in a stand-alone format to delete objects. The image name and extension support the use of the asterisk (*) as a wild card. This allows you to easily delete a selected groups of objects. Format ÎDd:o.x This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = location of stored object

o = object name x = extension

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: R: Accepted Values: any 1 to 8 character name Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used Accepted Values: any extension conforming to Zebra conventions Default Value: .GRF

Example To delete stored formats from DRAM:

^XA ^IDR:*.ZPL^FS ^XZ

Example To delete formats and images named SAMPLE from DRAM, regardless of the

extension: XA ^IDR:SAMPLE.*^FS ^XZ

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^ID

181

Example To delete the image SAMPLE1.GRF prior to storing SAMPLE2.GRF:

^XA ^FO25,25ÂD,18,10 ^FDDelete^FS ^FO25,45ÂD,18,10 ^FDthen Save^FS ÎDR:SAMPLE1.GRF^FS ÎSR:SAMPLE2.GRF^FS^XZ

Example In this the * is a wild card, indicating that all objects with the .GRF extension are

deleted: ^XA ÎDR:*.GRF^FS ^XZ Comments When an object is deleted from R:, the object can no longer be used and memory is available for storage. This applies only to R:memory. With the other memory types (A:, B:, E:) the deleted object is no longer available. The memory space recovers when an automatic defragmentation or initiallization occurs. The ÎD command also frees up the uncompressed version of the object in DRAM. If the name is specified as *.ZOB, all downloaded bar code fonts (or other objects) are deleted. If the named downloadable object cannot be found in the R:, E:, B:, and A: device, the ÎD command is ignored.

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^IM

ÎM
Image Move
Description The ÎM command performs a direct move of an image from storage area into the bitmap. The command is identical to the ^XG command (Recall Graphic), except there are no sizing parameters. Format ÎMd:o.x This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = location of stored object o = object name x = extension

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: search priority Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used Fixed Value: .GRF

Example This example moves the image SAMPLE.GRF from DRAM and prints it in several locations in its original size.

^XA ^FO100,100ÎMR:SAMPLE.GRF^FS ^FO100,200ÎMR:SAMPLE.GRF^FS ^FO100,300ÎMR:SAMPLE.GRF^FS ^FO100,400ÎMR:SAMPLE.GRF^FS ^FO100,500ÎMR:SAMPLE.GRF^FS ^XZ Comments By using the ^FO command, the graphic image can be positioned anywhere on the label. The difference between ÎM and ^XG: ÎM does not have magnification, and therefore might require less formatting time. However, to take advantage of this, the image must be at a 8-, 16, or 32-bit boundary.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^IS

185

^IS
Image Save
Description The ^IS command is used within a label format to save that format as a graphic image, rather than as a ZPL II script. It is typically used toward the end of a script. The saved image can later be recalled with virtually no formatting time and overlaid with variable data to form a complete label. Using this technique to overlay the image of constant information with the variable data greatly increases the throughput of the label format.
\

Important See ^IL on page 182.

Format ^ISd:o.x,p This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = location of stored object o = object name x = extension p = print image after storing

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: R: Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used Accepted Values: .GRF or .PNG Default Value: .GRF Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: Y

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

186

ZPL Commands ^IS

Example This is an example of using the ^IS command to save a label format to DRAM. The name used to store the graphic is SAMPLE2.GRF.

ZPL II CODE ^XA ^LH10,15^FWN^BY3,3,85^CFD,36 ^GB430,750,4^FS ^FO10,170^GB200,144,2^FS ^FO10,318^GB410,174,2^FS ^FO212,170^GB206,144,2^FS ^FO10,498^GB200,120,2^FSR ^FO212,498^GB209,120,2^FS ^FO4,150^GB422,10,10^FS ^FO135,20Â0,70,60 ^FDZEBRA^FS ^FO80,100Â0,40,30 ^FDTECHNOLOGIES CORP^FS ^FO15,180^CFD,18,10^FS ^FDARTICLE#^FS ^FO218,180 ^FDLOCATION^FS ^FO15,328 ^FDDESCRIPTION^FS ^FO15,508 ^FDREQ.NO.^FS ^FO220,508 ^FDWORK NUMBER^FS ^FO15,630ÂD,36,20 ^FDCOMMENTS:^FS ÎSR:SAMPLE2.GRF,Y ^XZ

GENERATED LABEL

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~JA

187

~JA
Cancel All
Description The ~JA command cancels all format commands in the buffer. It also cancels any batches that are printing. The printer stops after the current label is finished printing. All internal buffers are cleared of data and the DATA LED turn off. Submitting this command to the printer scans the buffer and deletes only the data before the ~JA in the input buffer it does not scan the remainder of the buffer for additional ~JA commands. Format ~JA

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

188

ZPL Commands ^JB

^JB
Initialize Flash Memory
Description The ^JB command is used to initialize various types of Flash memory available in the Zebra printers. Format ^JBa This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = device to initialize

Acceptable Values:

A = Compact Flash memory B = Flash card (PCMCIA) E = internal Flash memory Default Value: a device must be specified

Example This is an example of initializing the different types of flash memory:

^JBA initializes initial Compact Flash memory when installed in the printer. ^JBB initializes the optional Flash card when installed in the printer. ^JBE initializes the optional Flash memory when installed in the printer.

Note Initializing memory can take several minutes. Be sure to allow sufficient time for the

initialization to complete before power cycling the printer.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~JB

189

~JB
Reset Optional Memory
Description The ~JB command is used for these conditions: The ~JB command must be sent to the printer if the battery supplying power to the battery powered memory card fails and is replaced. A bad battery shows a battery dead condition on the Printer Configuration Label. The ~JB command can also be used to intentionally clear (reinitialize) the B: memory card. The card must not be write protected. Format ~JB Comments If the battery is replaced and this command is not sent to the printer, the memory card cannot function.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

190

ZPL Commands ~JC

~JC
Set Media Sensor Calibration
Description The ~JC command is used to force a label length measurement and adjust the media and ribbon sensor values. Format ~JC Comments In Continuous Mode, only the media and ribbon sensors are calibrated.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~JD

191

~JD
Enable Communications Diagnostics
Description The ~JD command initiates Diagnostic Mode, which produces an ASCII printout (using current label length and full width of printer) of all characters received by the printer. This printout includes the ASCII characters, the hexadecimal value, and any communication errors. Format ~JD

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

192

ZPL Commands ~JE

~JE
Disable Diagnostics
Description The ~JE command cancels Diagnostic Mode and returns the printer to normal label printing. Format ~JE

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~JF

193

~JF
Set Battery Condition
Description There are two low battery voltage levels sensed by the PA/PT400 printers. When battery voltage goes below the first level, the green LED begins flashing as a warning but printing continues. When this warning occurs, it is recommended to recharge the battery. As printing continues, a second low voltage level is reached. At this point, both green and orange LEDs flash as a warning, and printing automatically pauses. When pause on low voltage is active (~JFY) and the battery voltage level falls below the second low voltage level, printing pauses and an error condition is displayed as an indication that the printer should be plugged into the battery charger. By pressing FEED, printing continues on a label-by-label basis, but there is a high risk of losing label format information due to the continued decrease of battery voltage. When pause on low voltage is not active (~JFN), and the battery voltage level falls below the second low voltage level, printing continues and the orange LED remains off. If the battery voltage continues to decrease, label information could be lost and cause the printer to stop operating. This option should be selected only when the printer is connected to the Car Battery Adapter. From time to time the printer might sense that battery voltage is below the first low voltage level, but due to the continuous recharging of the car battery, further loss of battery voltage is not a concern and printing continues. If this option is not selected when using the Car Battery Adapter, you might need to press FEED to take the printer out of Pause Mode and print each label. Format ~JFp This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

p = pause on low voltage

Accepted Values: Y (pause on low voltage) or N (do not pause) N is suggested when the printer is powered by the Car Battery Adapter. Default Value: Y

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

194

ZPL Commands ~JG

~JG
Graphing Sensor Calibration
Description The ~JG command is used to force a label length measurement, recalibrate the media and ribbon sensors, and print a graph (media sensor profile) of the sensor values. Format ~JG
Example Sending the ~JG command to the printer produces a series of labels resembling

this image:
GENERATED LABELS

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^JJ

195

^JJ
Set Auxiliary Port
Description The ^JJ command allows you to control an online verifier or applicator device. Format ^JJa,b,c,d,e,f This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = operational mode for auxiliary port

Accepted Values: 0 = off 1 = reprint on errorthe printer stops on a label with a verification error. When PAUSE is pressed, the label reprints (if ^JZ is set to reprint). If a bar code is near the upper edge of a label, the label feeds out far enough for the bar code to be verified and then backfeeds to allow the next label to be printed and verified. 2 = maximum throughputthe printer stops when a verification error is detected. The printer starts printing the next label while the verifier is still checking the previous label. This mode provides maximum throughput, but does not allow the printer to stop immediately on a label with a verification error. Default Value: 0

b = application mode Accepted Values: 0 = off 1 = End Print signal normally high, and low only when the printer is moving the label forward. 2 = End Print signal normally low, and high only when the printer is moving the label forward. 3 = End Print signal normally high, and low for 20 ms when a label has been printed and positioned. 4 = End Print signal normally low, and high for 20 ms when a label has been printed and positioned. Default Value: 0 c = application mode start signal print
Accepted Values: p = Pulse Mode Start Print signal must be de-asserted before it can be asserted for the next label. l = Level Mode Start Print signal does not need to be deasserted to print the next label. As long as the Start Print signal is low and a label is formatted, a label prints. Default Value: 0

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

196

ZPL Commands ^JJ

Parameters

Details

d = application label error mode

Accepted Values: e = error modethe printer asserts the Service Required signal (svce_req - pin 10) on the application port, enters into Pause Mode, and displays an error message on the LCD. f = Feed Modea blank label prints when the web is not found where expected to sync the printer to the media. Default Value: f Accepted Values: e = enabledthe last label reprints after the signal is asserted. If a label is canceled, the label to be reprinted is also canceled. This mode consumes more memory because the last printed label is not released until it reprints. d = disabledprinter ignores the Reprint signal. Default Value: d

e = reprint mode

f = ribbon low mode Accepted Values: e = enabled printer warning issued when ribbon low. d = disabled printer warning not issued when ribbon low. Default Value: e

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~JL

197

~JL
Set Label Length
Description The ~JL command is used to set the label length. Depending on the size of the label, the printer feeds one or more blank labels. Format ~JL

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

198

ZPL Commands ^JM

^JM
Set Dots per Millimeter
Description The ^JM command lowers the density of the print24 dots/mm becomes 12, 12 dots/mm becomes 6, 8 dots/mm becomes 4, and 6 dots/mm becomes 3. ^JM also affects the field origin (^FO) placement on the label (see example below). When sent to the printer, the ^JM command doubles the format size of the label. Depending on the printhead, normal dot-per-millimeter capabilities for a Zebra printer are 12 dots/mm (304 dots/inch), 8 dots/mm (203 dots/inch) or 6 dots/mm (153 dots/inch). This command must be entered before the first ^FS command in a format. The effects of ^JM are persistent. Format ^JMn This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

n = set dots per millimeter

Accepted Values: A = 24 dots/mm, 12 dots/mm, 8 dots/mm or 6 dots/mm B = 12 dots/mm, 6 dots/mm, 4 dots/mm or 3 dots/mm Default Value: A

Accepted Values: A = auto select R = reflective sensor T = transmissive sensor Default Value: Z-Series = A and the S4M = R

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

204

ZPL Commands ~JS

~JS
Change Backfeed Sequence
Description The ~JS command is used to control the backfeed sequence. This command can be used on printers with or without built-in cutters. These are the primary applications: to allow programming of the rest point of the cut edge of continuous media. provide immediate backfeed after peel-off when the printer is used in a print/apply application configuration.

This command stays in effect only until the printer is turned off, a new ~JS command is sent, or the setting is changed on the control panel. When a ~JS command is encountered, it overrides the current control panel setting for the Backfeed Sequence. The most common way of eliminating backfeed is to operate in Rewind Mode. Rewind Mode does not backfeed at all. After a label prints, the leading edge of the next label is placed at the print line. This eliminates the need to backfeed and does not introduce a non printable area at the leading edge or bottom of the label. It also does not allow the label to be taken from the printer because it is not fed out from under the printhead. Running in another mode with backfeed turned off allows the label to be removed and eliminates the time-reduction of the backfeed sequence. Format ~JSb This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

b = backfeed order in relation to printing

Accepted Values: A = 100 percent backfeed after printing and cutting B = 0 percent backfeed after printing and cutting, and 100 percent before printing the next label N = normal 90 percent backfeed after label is printed O = off turn backfeed off completely 10 to 90 = percentage value The value entered must be a multiple of 10. Values not divisible by 10 are rounded to the nearest acceptable value. For example, ~JS55 is accepted as 50 percent backfeed. Default Value: N

Comments When using a specific value, the difference between the value entered and 100 percent is calculated before the next label is printed. For example, a value of 40 means 40 percent of the backfeed takes place after the label is cut or removed. The remaining 60 percent takes place before the next label is printed.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~JS

205

The value for this command is also reflected in the Backfeed parameter on the printer configuration label. For ~JSN the Backfeed parameter is listed as DEFAULT For ~JSA or 100 the Backfeed parameter is listed as AFTER For ~JSB or 0 the Backfeed parameter is listed as BEFORE For ~JS10 to 90 the Backfeed parameter is listed as the value entered

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

206

ZPL Commands ^JT

^JT
Head Test Interval
Description The ^JT command allows you to change the printhead test interval from every 100 labels to any desired interval. With the ^JT command, the printer is allowed to run the test after printing a label. When a parameter is defined, the printer runs the test after printing a set amount of labels. The printers default head test state is off. Parameters for running the printhead test are defined by the user. Format ^JT####,a,b,c This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

#### = four-digit number of labels printed between head tests a = manually select range of elements to test

Accepted Values: 0000 to 9999 If a value greater than 9999 is entered, it is ignored. Default Value: 0000 (off) Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Initial Value at Power-up: N Accepted Values: 0 to 9999 Initial Value at Power-up: 0

b = first element to check when parameter a is Y c = last element to check when parameter a is Y

Accepted Values: 0 to 9999 Initial Value at Power-up: 9999

Comments The ^JT command supports testing a range of print elements. The printer automatically selects the test range by tracking which elements have been used since the previous test.

^JT also turns on Automatic Mode to specify the first and last elements for the head test. This makes it possible to select any specific area of the label or the entire print width.
If the last element selected is greater than the print width selected, the test stops at the selected print width. Whenever the head test command is received, a head test is performed on the next label unless the count is set to 0 (zero).

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^JU

207

^JU
Configuration Update
Description The ^JU command sets the active configuration for the printer. Format ^JUa This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = active configuration

Accepted Values: F = reload factory values These values are lost at power-off if not saved with ^JUS. R = recall last saved values S = save current settings These values are used at power-on. Default Value: a value must be specified

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

208

ZPL Commands ^JW

^JW
Set Ribbon Tension
Description ^JW sets the ribbon tension for the printer it is sent to. Format ^JWt This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

t = tension

Accepted Values: L = low M = medium H = high Default Value: a value must be specified

Comments ^JW is used only for PAX series printers.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~JX

209

~JX
Cancel Current Partially Input Format
Description The ~JX command cancels a format currently being sent to the printer. It does not affect any formats currently being printed, or any subsequent formats that might be sent. Format ~JX

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

214

ZPL Commands ^KN

^KN
Define Printer Name
Description The printers network name and description can be set using the ^KN command. ^KN is designed to make your Zebra printer easy for users to identify. The name the administrator designates is listed on the configuration label and on the Web page generated by the printer. Format ^KNa,b This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = printer name

Accepted Values: up to 16 alphanumeric characters Default Value: if a value is not entered, the parameter is ignored If more than 16 characters are entered, only the first 16 are used. Accepted Values: up to 35 alphanumeric characters Default Value: if a value is not entered, the parameter is ignored If more than 35 characters are entered, only the first 35 are used.

b = printer description

Example This is an example of how to change the printers network name an description:

This shows how a configuration looks before using this command and after using this command: ^XA ^KNZebra1,desk_printer ^XZ

Before using this command:

After using this command:

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^KP

215

^KP
Define Password
Description The ^KP command is used to define the password that must be entered to access the control panel switches and LCD Setup Mode. Format ^KPa,b This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = mandatory fourdigit password

b = password level

Accepted Values: any four-digit numeric sequence Default Value: 1234 Accepted Values: 1, 2, 3, 4 Default Value: 3

Example This is an example of how to set a new control panel password:

^XA ^KP5678 ^XZ Comments If you forget your password, the printer can be returned to a default Setup Mode and the default password 1234 is valid again. Caution should be used, however this also sets the printer configuration values back to their defaults. To return the printer to the default factory settings using ZPL, send this: ^XA ^JUF ^XZ To return the printer to the default factory settings using the control panel keys, see your printers User Guide for the procedure.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

216

ZPL Commands ^LH

^LH
Label Home
Description The ^LH command sets the label home position. The default home position of a label is the upper-left corner (position 0,0 along the x and y axis). This is the axis reference point for labels. Any area below and to the right of this point is available for printing. The ^LH command changes this reference point. For instance, when working with preprinted labels, use this command to move the reference point below the preprinted area. This command affects only fields that come after it. It is recommended to use ^LH as one of the first commands in the label format. Format ^LHx,y This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

x = x-axis position (in dots) y = y-axis position (in dots)

Accepted Values: 0 to 32000 Initial Value at Power-up: 0 or last permanently saved value Accepted Values: 0 to 32000 Initial Value at Power-up: 0 or last permanently saved value

Depending on the printhead used in your printer, use one of these when figuring the values for x and y: 6 dots = 1 mm, 152 dots = 1 inch 8 dots = 1 mm, 203 dots = 1 inch 11.8 dots = 1 mm, 300 dots = 1 inch 24 dots = 1 mm, 608 dots = 1 inch Comments To be compatible with existing printers, this command must come before the first ^FS (Field Separator) command. Once you have issued an ^LH command, the setting is retained until you turn off the printer or send a new ^LH command to the printer.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^LL

217

^LL
Label Length
Description The ^LL command defines the length of the label. This command is necessary when using continuous media (media not divided into separate labels by gaps, spaces, notches, slots, or holes). To affect the current label and be compatible with existing printers, ^LL must come before the first ^FS (Field Separator) command. Once you have issued ^LL, the setting is retained until you turn off the printer or send a new ^LL command. Format ^LLy This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

y = y-axis position (in dots)

Accepted Values: 1 to 32000, not to exceed the maximum label size. While the printer accepts any value for this parameter, the amount of memory installed determines the maximum length of the label. Default Value: typically set through the LCD (if applicable), or to the maximum label length capability of the printer.

Comments These formulas can be used to determine the value of y: For 6 dot/mm printheads... For 8 dot/mm printheads... For 12 dot/mm printheads... For 24 dot/mm printheads... Label length in inches x 152.4 (dots/inch) = y Label length in inches x 203.2 (dots/inch) = y Label length in inches x 304.8 (dots/inch) = y Label length in inches x 609.6 (dots/inch) = y

Values for y depend on the memory size. If the entered value for y exceeds the acceptable limits, the bottom of the label is cut off. The label also shifts down from top to bottom. If multiple ^LL commands are issued in the same label format, the last ^LL command affects the next label unless it is prior to the first ^FS.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

218

ZPL Commands ^LR

^LR
Label Reverse Print
Description The ^LR command reverses the printing of all fields in the label format. It allows a field to appear as white over black or black over white. Using the ^LR is identical to placing an ^FR command in all current and subsequent fields. Format ^LRa This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = reverse print all fields

Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Initial Value at Power-up: N or last permanently saved value

Example This is an example that shows printing white over black and black over white. The ^GB command is used to create the black background.

Comments The ^LR setting remains active unless turned off by ^LRN or the printer is turned off.
Note ^GB needs to be used together with ^LR.

Only fields following this command are affected.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^LS

219

^LS
Label Shift
Description The ^LS command allows for compatibility with Z-130 printer formats that are set for less than full label width. It is used to shift all field positions to the left so the same commands used on a Z-130 or Z-220 Printer can be used on other Zebra printers. To determine the value for the ^LS command, use this formula: Z-130 and Z-220 values for ^LHx + ^FOx (distance from edge of label) = printer value for ^LSa If the print position is less than 0, set ^LS to 0. Format ^LSa
Important The ability to save the ^LS command depends on the version of firmware.

This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters Details

a = shift left value (in dots)

Accepted Values: -9999 to 9999 Initial Value at Power-up: 0

Comments When entering positive values, it is not necessary to use the + sign. The value is assumed to be positive unless preceded by a negative sign (-). To be compatible with existing Zebra printers, this command must come before the first ^FS (Field Separator) command. Once you have issued an ^LS command, the setting is retained until you turn off the printer or send a new ^LS command to the printer.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

Example These examples show setting the printer to different darkness levels:

If the current value (value on configuration label) is 16, entering the command ^MD-9 decreases the value to 7. If the current value (value on configuration label) is 1, entering the command ^MD15 increases the value to 16. If the current value (value on configuration label) is 25, entering the command ^MD10 increases only the value to 30, which is the maximum value allowed. Each ^MD command is treated separately in relation to the current value as printed on the configuration label.

Important The darkness setting range for the XiIIIPlus is 0 to 30 in increments of 0.1.

The firmware is setup so that the ^MD and ~SD commands (ZPL darkness commands) accepts that range of settings.
Example These are examples of the XiIIIPlus Darkness Setting:

^MD8.3 ~SD8.3

Example For example, this is what would happen if two ^MD commands were received:

Assume the current value is 15. An ^MD-6 command is received that changes the current value to 9. Another command, ^MD2, is received. The current value changes to 17. The two ^MD commands are treated individually in relation to the current value of 15. Comments The ~SD command value, if applicable, is added to the ^MD command.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^MF

223

^MF
Media Feed
Description The ^MF command dictates what happens to the media at power-up and at head-close after the error clears. Format ^MFp,h This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

p = feed action at power-up

Accepted Values: F = feed to the first web after sensor C = (see ~JC on page 190 definition) L = (see ~JL on page 197 definition) N = no media feed Default Value: platform-dependent

h = feed action after Accepted Values: closing printhead F = feed to the first web after sensor C = (see ~JC on page 190 definition) L = (see ~JL on page 197 definition) N = no media feed Default Value: platform-dependent
Comments It is important to remember that if you choose the N setting, the printer assumes that the media and its position relative to the printhead are the same as before power was turned off or the printhead was opened. Use the ^JU command to save changes.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

224

ZPL Commands ^ML

^ML
Maximum Label Length
Description The ^ML command lets you adjust the maximum label length. Format ^MLa,b,c,d This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = maximum label length (in dot rows)

Accepted Values: 0 to maximum length of label Default Value: last permanently saved value

Comments For calibration to work properly, you must set the maximum label length equal to or greater than your actual label length.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^MM

225

^MM
Print Mode
Description The ^MM command determines the action the printer takes after a label or group of labels has printed. Format ^MMa,b This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = desired mode

Accepted Values: T = Tear-off P = Peel-off (not available on S-300) R = Rewind (depends on printer model) A = Applicator (depends on printer model) C = Cutter (depends on printer model) D = Delayed cutter Default Value: T The values available for parameter a are dependent on the printer being used and whether it supports the option.

b = prepeel select

Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: Y The command is ignored if parameters are missing or invalid. The current value of the command remains unchanged.

This bulleted list identifies the different modes of operation: Tear-off after printing, the label advances so the web is over the tear bar. The label, with liner attached, can be torn off manually. Peel-off after printing, the label moves forward and activates a Label Available Sensor. Printing stops until the label is manually removed from the printer. Power Peel liner automatically rewinds using an optional internal rewind spindle. Value Peel liner feeds down the front of the printer and is manually removed. Prepeel after each label is manually removed, the printer feeds the next label forward to prepeel a small portion of the label away from the liner material. The printer then backfeeds and prints the label. The prepeel feature assists in the proper peel operation of some media types.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

226

ZPL Commands ^MM

Rewind the label and backing are rewound on an (optional) external rewind device. The next label is positioned under the printhead (no backfeed motion). Applicator when used with an application device, the label move far enough forward to be removed by the applicator and applied to an item. Cutter after printing, the media feeds forward and is automatically cut into predetermined lengths. Comments Be sure to select the appropriate value for the print mode being used to avoid unexpected results.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^MN

227

^MN
Media Tracking
Description The ^MN command relays to the printer what type of media is being used (continuous or non-continuous) for purposes of tracking. This bulleted list shows the types of media associated with this command: Continuous Media this media has no physical characteristic (web, notch, perforation, mark, et cetera) to separate labels. Label length is determined by the ^LL command. Non-continuous Media this media has some type of physical characteristic (web, notch, perforation, mark, et cetera) to separate the labels. Format ^MNa This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = media being used Accepted Values: N = continuous media Y = non-continuous media web sensing * W = non-continuous media web sensing * M = non-continuous media mark sensing Default Value: a value must be entered or the command is ignored
* provides the same result.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

228

ZPL Commands ^MP

^MP
Mode Protection
Description The ^MP command is used to disable the various mode functions on the control panel. Once disabled, the settings for the particular mode function can no longer be changed and the LED associated with the function does not light. Because this command has only one parameter, each mode must be disabled with an individual ^MP command. Format ^MPa This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = mode to protect

Accepted Values: D = disable Darkness Mode P = disable Position Mode C = disable Calibration Mode E = enable all modes S = disable all mode saves (modes can be adjusted but values are not saved) W = disable Pause F = disable Feed X = disable Cancel M = disable menu changes Default Value: a value must be entered or the command is ignored

Example This example disables these modes, D and C.

^XA ^MPD ^MPC ^XZ

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^MT

229

^MT
Media Type
Description The ^MT command selects the type of media being used in the printer. There are two choices for this command: Thermal Transfer Media this media uses a high-carbon black or colored ribbon. The ink on the ribbon is bonded to the media. Direct Thermal Media this media is heat sensitive and requires no ribbon.

Format ^MTa This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = media type used

Accepted Values: T = thermal transfer media D = direct thermal media Default Value: a value must be entered or the command is ignored

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

230

ZPL Commands ^MU

^MU
Set Units of Measurement
Description The ^MU command sets the units of measurement the printer uses. ^MU works on a field-by-field basis. Once the mode of units is set, it carries over from field to field until a new mode of units is entered.

^MU also allows for printing at lower resolutions 600 dpi printers are capable of printing at 300, 200, and 150 dpi; 300 dpi printers are capable of printing at 150 dpi.
Format ^MUa,b,c This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = units

Accepted Values: D = dots I = inches M = millimeters Default Value: D Accepted Values: 150, 200, 300 Default Value: a value must be entered or the command is ignored Accepted Values: 300, 600 Default Value: a value must be entered or the command is ignored

b = format base in dots per inch c = desired dots-perinch conversion

Example This is an example of Setting Units:

Assume 8 dot/millimeter (203 dot/inch) printer. Field based on dots: ^MUd^FO100,100^GB1024,128,128^FS Field based on millimeters: ^MUm^FO12.5,12.5^GB128,16,16^FS Field based on inches: ^MUi^FO.493,.493^GB5.044,.631,.631^FS

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^MU

231

Example This is an example of Converting dpi Values.

Convert a 150 dpi format to a 300 dpi format with a base in dots: ^MUd,150,300 Convert a 150 dpi format to a 600 dpi format with a base in dots: ^MUd,150,600 Convert a 200 dpi format to a 600 dpi format with a base in dots: ^MUd,200,600 To reset the conversion factor to the original format, enter matching values for parameters b and c: ^MUd,150,150 ^MUd,200,200 ^MUd,300,300 ^MUd,600,600 Comments This command should appear at the beginning of the label format to be in proper ZPL II format. To turn the conversion off, enter matching values for parameter b and c.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

232

ZPL Commands ^MW

^MW
Modify Head Cold Warning
Description The ^MW command allows you to set the head cold warning indicator based on the operating environment. Format ^MWy This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = enable head cold warning

Accepted Values: y = enable head cold warning n = disable head cold warning

Important When a parameter is not given, the instruction is ignored.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~NC

233

~NC
Network Connect
Description The ~NC command is used to connect a particular printer to a network by calling up the printers network ID number. Format ~NC### This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

### = network ID number assigned (must be a threedigit entry)

Accepted Values: 001 to 999 Default Value: 000 (none)

Comments Use this command at the beginning of any label format to specify which printer on the network is going to be used. Once the printer is established, it continues to be used until it is changed by another ~NC command. This command must be included in the label format to wake up the printer. The commands ^MW, ~NC, ^NI, ~NR, and ~NT are used only with RS-485 printer communications.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

^NS
Change Networking Settings
Description The ^NS command is used to change Ethernet network settings. Format ^NSa,b,c,d This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = network setting

Accepted Values: IP Resolution. a = all b = BOOTP c = DHCP and BOOTP d = DHCP g = gleaning only r = RARP p = permanent Accepted Values: 0 to 255 Accepted Values: 0 to 255 Accepted Values: 0 to 255

b = IP Address c = Subnet Mask d = Default Gateway

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~NT

237

~NT
Set Currently Connected Printer Transparent
Description The ~NT command sets the currently connected network printer to be transparent. Format ~NT Comments With Z Series printers, the ~NT command functions the same as the ~NR command. All Z Series printers on a network receive the transmission. The commands ~NC, ^NI, ~NR, and ~NT are used only with RS-485 printer communications.

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

240

ZPL Commands ^PM

^PM
Printing Mirror Image of Label
Description The ^PM command prints the entire printable area of the label as a mirror image. This command flips the image from left to right. Format ^PMa This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = print mirror image of entire label

Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N

Example This is an example of printing a mirror image on a label:

ZPL II CODE ^XA^PMY ^FO100,100 ^CFG ^FDMIRROR^FS ^FO100,160 ^FDIMAGE^FS ^XZ

GENERATED LABEL

Comments If the parameter is missing or invalid, the command is ignored. Once entered, the ^PM command remains active until ^PMN is received or the printer is turned off.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^PO

241

^PO
Print Orientation
Description The ^PO command inverts the label format 180 degrees. The label appears to be printed upside down. If the original label contains commands such as ^LL, ^LS, ^LT and ^PF, the inverted label output is affected differently. Format ^POa This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = invert label 180 degrees

Accepted Values: N (normal) or I (invert) Default Value: N

Example This is an example of printing a label at 180 degrees:

The ^POI command inverts the x, y coordinates. All image placement is relative to these inverted coordinates. Therefore, a different ^LH (Label Home) can be used to move the print back onto the label. Comments If multiple ^PO commands are issued in the same label format, only the last command sent to the printer is used. Once the ^PO command is sent, the setting is retained until another ^PO command is received or the printer is turned off.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

242

ZPL Commands ^PP ~PP

^PP ~PP
Programmable Pause
Description The ~PP command stops printing after the current label is complete (if one is printing) and places the printer in Pause Mode. The ^PP command is not immediate. Therefore, several labels might print before a pause is performed. This command pauses the printer after the current format prints. The operation is identical to pressing PAUSE on the control panel of the printer. The printer remains paused until PAUSE is pressed or a ~PS (Print Start) command is sent to the printer. Format ^PP or ~PP

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^PQ

243

^PQ
Print Quantity
Description The ^PQ command gives control over several printing operations. It controls the number of labels to print, the number of labels printed before printer pauses, and the number of replications of each serial number. Format ^PQq,p,r,o This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

q = total quantity of labels to print p = pause and cut value (labels between pauses) r = replicates of each serial number o = override pause count

Accepted Value: 1 to 99,999,999 Default Value: 1 Accepted Value: 1 to 99,999,999 Default Value: 0 (no pause) Accepted Value: 0 to 99,999,999 replicates Default Value: 0 (no replicates) Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N

If the o parameter is set to Y, the printer cuts but does not pause, and the printer does not pause after every group count of labels has been printed. With the o parameter set to N (default), the printer pauses after every group count of labels has been printed.
Example This example shows the control over print operations:

^PQ50,10,1,Y: This example prints a total of 50 labels with one replicate of each serial number. It prints the total quantity in groups of 10, but does not pause after every group. ^PQ50,10,1,N: This example prints a total of 50 labels with one replicate of each serial number. It prints the total quantity in groups of 10, pausing after every group.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

244

ZPL Commands ^PR

^PR
Print Rate
Description The ^PR command determines the media and slew speed (feeding a blank label) during printing. The printer operates with the selected speeds until the setting is reissued or the printer is turned off. The print speed is application-specific. Because print quality is affected by media, ribbon, printing speeds, and printer operating modes, it is very important to run tests for your applications.
Important Some models go to default print speed when power is turned off.

Format ^PRp,s,b This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

p = print speed

Accepted Values:

A or 2 = 50.8 mm/sec. (2 inches/sec.) B or 3 = 76.2 mm/sec. (3 inches/sec.) C or 4 = 101.6 mm/sec. (4 inches/sec.)

5 = 127 mm/sec.(5 inches/sec.)

D or 6 = 152.4 mm/sec. (6 inches/sec.) E or 8 = 203.2 mm/sec. (8 inches/sec.)

9 = 220.5 mm/sec. 9 inches/sec.) 10 = 245 mm/sec.(10 inches/sec.) 11 = 269.5 mm/sec.(11 inches/sec.) 12 = 304.8 mm/sec. 12 inches/sec.) Default Value: A

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^PR

245

Parameters

Details

s = slew speed

Accepted Values:

A or 2 = 50.8 mm/sec. (2 inches/sec.) B or 3 = 76.2 mm/sec. (3 inches/sec.) C or 4 = 101.6 mm/sec. (4 inches/sec.)

5 = 127 mm/sec. 5 inches/sec.)

D or 6 = 152.4 mm/sec. (6 inches/sec.) E or 8 = 203.2 mm/sec. (8 inches/sec.)

9 = 220.5 mm/sec. (9 inches/sec.) 10 = 245 mm/sec. (10 inches/sec.) 11 = 269.5 mm/sec. 11 inches/sec.) 12 = 304.8 mm/sec. 12 inches/sec.) Default Value: D

b = backfeed speed

Accepted Values:

A or 2 = 50.8 mm/sec. (2 inches/sec.) B or 3 = 76.2 mm/sec. (3 inches/sec.) C or 4 = 101.6 mm/sec. (4 inches/sec.)

5 = 127 mm/sec.(5 inches/sec.)

D or 6 = 152.4 mm/sec. (6 inches/sec.) E or 8 = 203.2 mm/sec. (8 inches/sec.)

9 = 220.5 mm/sec. 9 inches/sec.) 10 = 245 mm/sec. 10 inches/sec.) 11 = 269.5 mm/sec. 11 inches/sec.) 12 = 304.8 mm/sec. 12 inches/sec.) Default Value: A

Comments The speed setting for p, s, and b is dependent on the limitations of the printer. If a particular printer is limited to a rate of 6 ips (inches per second), a value of 12 can be entered but the printer performs only at a 6 ips rate. See your printers User Guide for specifics on performance.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

246

ZPL Commands ~PR

~PR
Applicator Reprint
Description The ~PR command is supported only by the PAX and PAX2-Series printers. If the ~PR command is enabled (see ^JJ on page 195), the last label printed reprint, similar to the applicator asserting the Reprint signal on the applicator port. Format ~PR Comments Pressing PREVIOUS on the control panel also causes the last label to reprint.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~PS

247

~PS
Print Start
Description The ~PS command causes a printer in Pause Mode to resume printing. The operation is identical to pressing PAUSE on the control panel of the printer when the printer is already in Pause Mode. Format ~PS

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

248

ZPL Commands ^PW

^PW
Print Width
Description The ^PW command allows you set the print width. Format ^PWa This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = label width (in dots)

Accepted Values: 2, to the width of the label If the value exceeds the width of the label, the width is set to the labels maximum size. Default Value: last permanently saved value

Limitation Not all Zebra printers support the ^PW command.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~RO

249

~RO
Reset Advanced Counter
Description The ~RO command resets the advanced counters used by the printer to monitor label generation in inches, centimeters, and number of labels. Two resettable counters are available and can be reset. Format ~ROc This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

c = counter number

Accepted Values: 1 or 2 Default Value: a value must be specified or the command is ignored

Example This is an example of the ~RO command.

Before

After

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

250

ZPL Commands ^SC

^SC
Set Serial Communications
Description The ^SC command allows you to change the serial communications parameters you are using. Format ^SCa,b,c,d,e,f This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = baud rate

Accepted Values: 110; 600; 1,200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 14400; 19200; 28800; 38400; or 57600; 115200 Default Value: must be specified or the parameter is ignored Accepted Values: 7 or 8 Default Value: must be specified Accepted Values: N (none), E (even), or O (odd) Default Value: must be specified Accepted Values: 1 or 2 Default Value: must be specified Accepted Values: X = XON/XOFF D = DTR/DSR R = RTS Default Value: must be specified Accepted Values: A = ACK/NAK N = none Z = Zebra Default Value: must be specified

b = word length (in data bits) c = parity d = stop bits e = protocol mode

f = Zebra protocol

Comments If any of the parameters are missing, out of specification, not supported by a particular printer, or have a ZPL-override DIP switch set, the command is ignored. A ^JUS command causes the changes in Communications Mode to persist through power-up and software resets.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~SD

251

~SD
Set Darkness
Description The ~SD command allows you to set the darkness of printing. ~SD is the equivalent of the darkness setting parameter on the control panel display. Format ~SD## This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

## = desired darkness setting (two-digit number)

Accepted Values: 00 to 30 Default Value: last permanently saved value

Example These are examples of the XiIIIPlus Darkness Setting:

^MD8.3 ~SD8.3 Comments The ^MD command value, if applicable, is added to the ~SD command.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

252

ZPL Commands ^SE

^SE
Select Encoding
Description The ^SE command is used to select the desired ZPL or ZPL II encoding table. Format ^SEd:o.x This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = location of encoding table o = name of encoding table x = extension

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: R: Accepted Value: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters Default Value: a value must be specified Fixed Value: .DAT

The encoding tables are provided with the font card or downloaded in flash with the font. The table appears as XXXXXXX.DAT in a directory label printed by the ZPL commands. The most active encoding table is indicated by the * on the directory label.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^SF

253

^SF
Serialization Field (with a Standard ^FD String)
Description The ^SF command allows you to serialize a standard ^FD string. The maximum size of the mask and increment string is 3K combined. Format ^SFa,b This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = mask string

The mask string sets the serialization scheme. The length of the string mask defines the number of characters in the current ^FD string to be serialized. The mask is aligned to the characters in the ^FD string starting with the right-mostposition. Mask String placeholders:

D or d Decimal numeric 09 H or h Hexadecimal 09 plus a-f or A-F O or o Octal 07 A or a Alphabetic AZ or az N or n Alphanumeric 09 plus AZ or az % Ignore character or skip b = increment string
The increment string is the value to be added to the field on each label. The default value is equivalent to a decimal value of one. The string is composed of any characters defined in the serial string. Invalid characters are assumed to be equal to a value of zero in that characters position. The increment value for alphabetic strings start with A or a as the zero placeholder. This means to increment an alphabetic character by one, a value of B or b must be in the increment string.

For characters that do not get incremented, the % character needs to be added to the increment string.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

254

ZPL Commands ^SF

Example This is an example of serializing a ^FD string. The ZPL II code generates three

separate labels as seen in Generated Labels:

ZPL II CODE ^XA ^FO100,100 ^CF0,100 ^FD12A^SFnnA,F^FS ^PQ3 ^XZ GENERATED LABELS

This mask has the first characters as alphanumeric (nn = 12) and the last digit as uppercase alphabetic (A). The decimal value of the increment number is equivalent to 5 (F). The number of labels generated depends on the number specified by the ^PQ command. In a similar instance, the ^FD string could be replaced with either of the ^FD strings below to generate a series of label, determined by ^PQ. Using this ZPL code: ^FDBL0000^SFAAdddd,1 The print sequence on this series of labels is: BL0000, BL0001,...BL0009, BL0010,... BL0099, BL0100,...BL9999, BM0000... Using this ZPL code: ^FDBL00-0^SFAAdd%d,1%1 The print sequence on this series of labels is: BL00-0, BL01-1, BL02-2,...BL09-9, BL11-0, BL12-1...

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^SF

255

Examples These examples show the importance of capitalization and location within the

mask. In this example, the printer cycles with every two printed labels and alternates between H (position 18), and then Z (position 36). With n or N, the serial number increments from 0 - 9 and az or AZ (36 positions overall). With each completed cycle, the second cluster (nn) increments one position (from 00, 01, 02 ) per cycle:
ZPL II CODE
^XA ^FO100,50^A0N,50,50^FDzzZ^SFnnN,I^FS ^PQ10 ^XZ

GENERATED LABELS

In this example, lower case i increments with a mask string of nnN. Nothing changes because the first cluster (Z) never triggers the second cluster (zz) to change.
ZPL II CODE
^XA ^FO100,50^A0N,50,50^FDzzZ^SFnnN,i^FS ^PQ10 ^XZ

GENERATED LABELS

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

256

ZPL Commands ^SL

^SL
Set Mode and Language (for Real-Time Clock)
Description The ^SL command is used to specify the Real-Time Clocks mode of operation and language for printing information.
Important

Time is read when the image is created. If the image stays in the queue longer than the specified time the image will be recreated with a new time. There are incidents when the same time or a larger space of time may be printed on labels. This is due to the format complexity and print speed. Format ^SLa,b This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = mode

Accepted Values: S = Start Time Mode. This is the time that is read from the Real-Time Clock when label formatting begins (when ^XA is received). The first label has the same time placed on it as the last label. T = Time Now Mode. This is the time that is read from the Real-Time Clock when the label to be printed is placed in print queue. Time Now is similar to a serialized time or date field. Numeric Value = With the Enhanced Real Time Clock (V60.13.0.10 and above) a time accuracy tolerance can be specified. Range = 1 to 999 seconds, 0 = one second tolerance Example: SL30,1 = Accuracy tolerance of 30 seconds and use English. Default Value: S

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^SL

257

Parameters

Details

b = language

Accepted Values: 1 = English 2 = Spanish 3 = French 4 = German 5 = Italian 6 = Norwegian 7 = Portuguese 8 = Swedish 9 = Danish 10 = Spanish 2 11 = Dutch 12 = Finnish Default Value: the language selected with ^KL or the control panel

Comments These are some comments to be aware of: The ^SL command must be placed before the first ^FO command. As of V60.13.0.10 all supported printers have Enhanced Real Time Clock capabilities the RTC will not print time fields that are more than sixty seconds old, rather it will update the time prior to printing (^SLT or ^SL60). To control time with increments other than sixty seconds the ^SL command can be used with a numeric value (^SL30). ^SLS can keep times longer than sixty seconds.
d

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

258

ZPL Commands ^SN

^SN
Serialization Data
Description The ^SN command allows the printer to index data fields by a selected increment or decrement value, making the data fields increase or decrease by a specified value each time a label is printed. This can be performed on 100 to 150 fields in a given format and can be performed on both alphanumeric and bar code fields. A maximum of 12 of the rightmost integers are subject to indexing. The first integer found when scanning from right to left starts the indexing portion of the data field. If the alphanumeric field to be indexed ends with an alpha character, the data is scanned, character by character, from right to left until a numeric character is encountered. Serialization takes place using the value of the first number found. Format ^SNv,n,z This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

v = starting value n = increment or decrement value

Accepted Values: 12-digits maximum for the portion to be indexed Default Value: 1 Accepted Values: 12-digit maximum Default Value: 1 To indicate a decrement value, precede the value with a minus () sign. Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N

z = add leading zeros (if needed)

Example This example shows incrementing by a specified value:

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^SN

259

Comments Incrementing and decrementing takes place for each serial-numbered field when all replicates for each serial number have been printed, as specified in parameter r of the ^PQ (print quality) command. If, during the course of printing serialized labels, the printer runs out of either paper or ribbon, the first label printed (after the media or ribbon has been replaced and calibration completed) has the same serial number as the partial label printed before the out condition occurred. This is done in case the last label before the out condition did not fully print. This is controlled by the ^JZ command.

Using Leading Zeros

In the ^SN command, the z parameter determines if leading zeros are printed or suppressed. Depending on which value is used (Y = print leading zeros; N = do not print leading zeros), the printer either prints or suppresses the leading zeros. The default value for this parameter is N (do not print leading zeros).

Print Leading Zeros

The starting value consists of the right-most consecutive sequence of digits. The width (number of digits in the sequence) is determined by scanning from right to left until the first non-digit (space or alpha character) is encountered. To create a specific width, manually place leading zeros as necessary.

Suppressing Leading Zeros

The starting value consists of the right-most consecutive sequence of digits, including any leading spaces. The width (number of digits in the sequence) is determined by scanning from right to left until the first alpha character (except a space) is encountered. To create a specific width, manually place leading spaces or zeros as necessary. Suppressed zeros are replaced by spaces. During the serialization process, when the entire number contains all zeros, the last zero is not suppressed. The ^SN command replaces the Field Data (^FD) command within a label formatting program.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

260

ZPL Commands ^SO

^SO
Set Offset (for Real-Time Clock)
Description The ^SO command is used to set the secondary and the tertiary offset from the primary Real-Time Clock.
Note For each label only one SO2 command can be used. If more than one offset is

required, SO3 must be used. Format ^SOa,b,c,d,e,f,g This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = clock set

Accepted Values: 2 = secondary 3 = third Default Value: value must be specified Accepted Values: 32000 to 32000 Default Value: 0 Accepted Values: 32000 to 32000 Default Value: 0 Accepted Values: 32000 to 32000 Default Value: 0 Accepted Values: 32000 to 32000 Default Value: 0 Accepted Values: 32000 to 32000 Default Value: 0 Accepted Values: 32000 to 32000 Default Value: 0

b = months offset c = days offset d = years offset e = hours offset f = minutes offset g = seconds offset

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^SP

261

^SP
Start Print
Description The ^SP command allows a label to start printing at a specified point before the entire label has been completely formatted. On extremely complex labels, this command can increase the overall throughput of the print. The command works as follows: Specify the dot row at which the ^SP command is to begin. This creates a label segment. Once the ^SP command is processed, all information in that segment prints. During the printing process, all of the commands after the ^SP continue to be received and processed by the printer. If the segment after the ^SP command (or the remainder of the label) is ready for printing, media motion does not stop. If the next segment is not ready, the printer stops mid-label and wait for the next segment to be completed. Precise positioning of the ^SP command requires a trial-and-error process, as it depends primarily on print speed and label complexity. The ^SP command can be effectively used to determine the worst possible print quality. You can determine whether using the ^SP command is appropriate for the particular application by using this procedure. If you send the label format up to the first ^SP command and then wait for printing to stop before sending the next segment, the printed label is a sample of the worst possible print quality. It drops any field that is out of order. If the procedure above is used, the end of the label format must be: ^SP#^FS Format ^SPa This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = dot row to start printing

Accepted Values: 0 to 32000 Default Value: 0

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

262

ZPL Commands ^SP

Example In this example, a label 800 dot rows in length uses ^SP500. Segment 1 prints while commands in Segment 2 are being received and formatted.

Dot position 0

Label Segment 2

Dot position 500

Label Segment 1
Dot position 800

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^SQ

263

^SQ
Halt ZebraNet Alert
Description The ^SQ command is used to stop the ZebraNet Alert option. Format ^SQa,b,c This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = condition type

Accepted Values: A = paper out B = ribbon out C = printhead over-temp D = printhead under-temp E = head open F = power supply over-temp G = ribbon-in warning (Direct Thermal Mode) H = rewind full I = cut error J = printer paused K = PQ job completed L = label ready M = head element out N = reserved O = reserved P = power on Q = clean printhead R = media low S = ribbon low T = replace head U = battery low V = all errors

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

264

ZPL Commands ^SQ

Parameters

Details

b = destination

Accepted Values: A = serial port B = parallel port C = e-mail address D = TCP/IP E = UDP/IP F = SNMP trap * = wild card to stop alerts for all destinations Accepted Values: Y = halt messages N = start messages Default Value: Y

c = halt messages

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^SR

265

^SR
Set Printhead Resistance
Description The ^SR command allows you to set the printhead resistance. Format ^SR#### This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

#### = resistance value (four-digit numeric value)

Accepted Value: 0488 to 1175 Default Value: last permanently saved value

Comments To avoid damaging the printhead, this value should be less than or equal to the value shown on the printhead being used. Setting a higher value could damage the printhead.
Note New printer models automatically set head resistance.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

266

ZPL Commands ^SS

^SS
Set Media Sensors
Description The ^SS command is used to change the values for media, web, ribbon, and label length set during the media calibration process. The media calibration process is described in your specific printers users guide. Format ^SSw,m,r,l,m2,r2,a,b,c This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

w = web (three-digit value) m = media (threedigit value) r = ribbon (threedigit value) l = label length (in dots, four-digit value) m2 = intensity of media LED (three-digit value) r2 = intensity of ribbon LED (three-digit value) a = mark sensing (three-digit value) b = mark media sensing (threedigit value) c = mark LED sensing (threedigit value)

Accepted Values: 000 to 100 Default Value: value shown on the media sensor profile or configuration label Accepted Values: 000 to 100 Default Value: value shown on the media sensor profile or configuration label Accepted Values: 000 to 100 Default Value: value shown on the media sensor profile or configuration label Accepted Values: 0001 to 32000 Default Value: value calculated in the calibration process Accepted Values: 000 to 100 Default Value: value calculated in the calibration process

Accepted Values: 000 to 100 Default Value: value calculated in the calibration process

Accepted Values: 000 to 100 Default Value: value calculated in the calibration process Accepted Values: 000 to 100 Default Value: value calculated in the calibration process Accepted Values: 000 to 100 Default Value: value calculated in the calibration process

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^SS

267

Example Below is an example of a media sensor profile. Notice the numbers from 000 to

100 and where the words WEB, MEDIA, and RIBBON appear in relation to those numbers. Also notice the black vertical spike. This represents where the printer sensed the transition from media-to-web-to-media.

The media and sensor profiles produced vary in appearance from printer to printer. Comments The m2 and r2 parameters have no effect in Stripe S-300 and S-500 printers. Maximum values for parameters depend on which printer platform is being used.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

268

ZPL Commands ^ST

^ST
Set Date and Time (for Real-Time Clock)
Description The ^ST command sets the date and time of the Real-Time Clock. Format ^STa,b,c,d,e,f,g This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = month b = day c = year d = hour e = minute f = second g = format

Accepted Values: 01 to 12 Default Value: current month Accepted Values: 01 to 31 Default Value: current day Accepted Values: 1998 to 2097 Default Value: current year Accepted Values: 00 to 23 Default Value: current hour Accepted Values: 00 to 59 Default Value: current minute Accepted Values: 00 to 59 Default Value: current second Accepted Values: A = a.m. P = p.m. M = 24-hour military Default Value: M

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^SX

269

^SX
Set ZebraNet Alert
Description The ^SX command is used to configure the ZebraNet Alert System. Format ^SXa,b,c,d,e,f This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Note The values in this table apply to firmware V48_12_4 and above.

Parameters

Details

a = condition type

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

270

ZPL Commands ^SX

Parameters

Details

b = destination for route alert

Accepted Values: A = serial port B* = parallel port C = e-mail address D = TCP/IP E = UDP/IP F = SNMP trap Default Value: if this parameter is missing or invalid, the command is ignored * Requires bidirectional communication. Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: Y or previously configured value Accepted Values: N = no Y = yes Default Value: N or previously configured value Parameters e and f are sub-options based on destination. If the sub-options are missing or invalid, these parameters are ignored. Accepted Values: Internet e-mail address (e.g. [email protected]) IP address (for example, 10.1.2.123) SNMP trap IP or IPX addresses Accepted Values: TCP port # (0 to 65535) UPD port # (0 to 65535)

c = enable condition set alert to this destination

d = enable condition clear alert to this destination

e = destination setting

f = port number

Example This is an example of the different (b) destinations that you can send for the condition type (a):

Serial: ^SXA,A,Y,Y Parallel: ^SXA,B,Y,Y E-Mail: ^SXA,C,Y,Y,[email protected] TCP: ^SXA,D,Y,Y,123.45.67.89,1234 UDP: ^SXA,E,Y,Y,123.45.67.89,1234 SNMP Trap: ^SXA,F,Y,Y,255.255.255.255 Comments In the example above for SNMP Trap, entering 255.255.255.255 broadcasts the notification to every SNMP manager on the network. To route the device to a single SNMP manager, enter a specific address (123.45.67.89).

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^SZ

271

^SZ
Set ZPL
Description The ^SZ command is used to select the programming language used by the printer. This command gives you the ability to print labels formatted in both ZPL and ZPL II. This command remains active until another ^SZ command is sent to the printer or the printer is turned off. Format ^SZa This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

a = ZPL version

Accepted Values: 1 = ZPL 2 = ZPL II Default Value: 2

Comments If the parameter is missing or invalid, the command is ignored.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

272

ZPL Commands ~TA

~TA
Tear-off Adjust Position
Description The ~TA command lets you adjust the rest position of the media after a label is printed, which changes the position at which the label is torn or cut. Format ~TA###
Important These are some important facts about this command:

For 600 dpi printers, the step size doubles. If the number of characters is less than 3, the command is ignored. This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

### = change in media rest position (3-digit value in dot rows must be used.)

Accepted Values: 120 to 120 Default Value: last permanent value saved

Comments If the parameter is missing or invalid, the command is ignored.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^TO

273

^TO
Transfer Object
Description The ^TO command is used to copy an object or group of objects from one storage device to another. It is similar to the copy function used in PCs. Source and destination devices must be supplied and must be different and valid for the action specified. Invalid parameters cause the command to be ignored. The asterisk (*) can be used as a wild card for object names and extensions. For instance, ZEBRA.* or *.GRF are acceptable forms for use with the ^TO command. At least one source parameter (d, o, or x) and one destination parameter (s, o, or x) must be specified. If only ^TO is entered, the command is ignored. Format ^TOs:o.x,d:o.x This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

s = source device of stored object o = stored object name

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: if a drive is not specified, all objects are transferred to the drive set in parameter s Accepted Values: any existing object conforming to Zebra conventions Default Value: if a name is not specified, * is used all objects are selected Accepted Values: any extension conforming to Zebra conventions Default Value: if an extension is not specified, * is used all extensions are selected Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: a destination must be specified Accepted Values: up to 8 alphanumeric characters Default Value: if a name is not specified, the name of the existing object is used Accepted Values: any extension conforming to Zebra conventions Default Value: if an extension is not specified, the extension of the existing object is used

x = extension

d = destination device of the stored object o = name of the object at destination x = extension

Comments Parameters o, x, and s support the use of the wild card (*). If the destination device does not have enough free space to store the object being copied, the command is canceled. Zebra files (Z:*.*) cannot be transferred. These files are copyrighted by Zebra Technologies.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

274

ZPL Commands ^TO

Transferring Objects
These are some examples of using the ^TO command.
Example To copy the object ZLOGO.GRF from DRAM to an optional Memory Card

and rename it ZLOGO1.GRF, write the following format: ^XA ^TOR:ZLOGO.GRF,B:ZLOGO1.GRF ^XZ

Example To copy the object SAMPLE.GRF from an optional Memory Card to DRAM

and keep the same name, write this format: ^XA ^TOB:SAMPLE.GRF,R:SAMPLE.GRF ^XZ

Transferring Multiple Objects

The asterisk (*) can be used to transfer multiple object files (except *.FNT) from DRAM to the Memory Card. For example, assume you have several object files that contain logos. These files are named LOGO1.GRF, LOGO2.GRF, and LOGO3.GRF. To transfer all these files to the memory card using the name NEW instead of LOGO, place an asterisk after the names NEW and LOGO in the transfer command. This copies all files beginning with LOGO in one command. ^XA ^TOR:LOGO*.GRF,B:NEW*.GRF ^XZ During a multiple transfer, if a file is too big to be stored on the memory card, that file is skipped. All remaining files attempt to be transferred. All files that can be stored within the space limitations are transferred, while other files are ignored.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ~WC

275

~WC
Print Configuration Label
Description The ~WC command is used to generate a printer configuration label. The printer configuration label contains information about the printer setup, such as sensor type, network ID, ZPL mode, firmware version, and descriptive data on the R:, E:, B:, and A: devices. Format ~WC Comments This command works only when the printer is idle.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

276

ZPL Commands ^WD

^WD
Print Directory Label
Description The ^WD command is used to print a label listing bar codes, objects stored in DRAM, or fonts. For bar codes, the list shows the name of the bar code. For fonts, the list shows the name of the font, the number to use with ^A command, and size. For objects stored in DRAM, the list shows the name of the object, extension, size, and option flags. All lists are enclosed in a double-line box. Format ~WDd:o.x This table identifies the parameters for this format:

Parameters

Details

d = source device optional o = object name optional x = extension optional

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, A: and Z: Default Value: R: Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters Default Value: * The use of a ? (question mark) is also allowed. Accepted Values: any extension conforming to Zebra conventions .FNT = font .BAR = bar code .ZPL = stored ZPL format .GRF = GRF graphic .CO = memory cache .DAT = font encoding .STO = data storage .PNG = PNG graphic * = all objects Default Value: * The use of a ? (question mark) is also allowed.

Example To print a label listing all objects in DRAM, enter:

^XA ^WDR:. ^XZ

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^WD

277

Example To print a label listing all resident bar codes, enter:

^XA ^WDZ:*.BAR ^XZ

Example To print a label listing all resident fonts, enter:

^XA ^WDZ:*.FNT ^XZ

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

278

ZPL Commands ^XA

^XA
Start Format
Description The ^XA command is used at the beginning of ZPL II code. It is the opening bracket and indicates the start of a new label format. This command is substituted with a single ASCII control character STX (control-B, hexadecimal 02). Format ^XA Comments Valid ZPL II format requires that label formats should start with the ^XA command and end with the ^XZ command.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^XB

279

^XB
Suppress Backfeed
Description The ^XB command suppresses forward feed of media to tear-off position depending on the current printer mode. Because no forward feed occurs, a backfeed before printing of the next label is not necessary; this improves throughput. When printing a batch of labels, the last label should not contain this command. Format ^XB

^XB in the Tear-off Mode

Normal Operation: backfeed, print, and feed to rest

^XB Operation: print (Rewind Mode)

^XB in Peel-off Mode

Normal Operation: backfeed, print, and feed to rest

^XB Operation: print (Rewind Mode)

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

280

ZPL Commands ^XF

^XF
Recall Format
Description The ^XF command recalls a stored format to be merged with variable data. There can be multiple ^XF commands in one format, and they can be located anywhere within the code. When recalling a stored format and merging data using the ^FN (Field Number) function, the calling format must contain the ^FN command to merge the data properly. While using stored formats reduces transmission time, no formatting time is saved. The ZPL II format being recalled is saved as text strings that need to be formatted at print time. Format ^XFd:o.x This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = source device of stored image o = name of stored image x = extension l

Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A: Default Value: search priority (R:, E:, B:, and A:) Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used Fixed Value: .ZPL

For a complete example of the ^DF and ^XF command, see ^DF and ^XF Download format and recall format on page 11.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL Commands ^XG

281

^XG
Recall Graphic
Description The ^XG command is used to recall one or more graphic images for printing. This command is used in a label format to merge graphics, such as company logos and piece parts, with text data to form a complete label. An image can be recalled and resized as many times as needed in each format. Other images and data might be added to the format. Format ^XGd:o.x,mx,my This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

d = source device of stored image o = name of stored image x = extension l mx = magnification factor on the xaxis my = magnification factor on the yaxis

Example This is an example of using the ^XG command to recall the image

SAMPLE.GRF from DRAM and print it in five different sizes in five different locations on the same label:
^XA ^FO100,100^XGR:SAMPLE.GRF,1,1^FS ^FO100,200^XGR:SAMPLE.GRF,2,2^FS ^FO100,300^XGR:SAMPLE.GRF,3,3^FS ^FO100,400^XGR:SAMPLE.GRF,4,4^FS ^FO100,500^XGR:SAMPLE.GRF,5,5^FS ^XZ

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

282

ZPL Commands ^XZ

^XZ
End Format
Description The ^XZ command is the ending (closing) bracket. It indicates the end of a label format. When this command is received, a label prints. This command can also be issued as a single ASCII control character ETX (Control-C, hexadecimal 03). Format ^XZ Comments Label formats must start with the ^XA command and end with the ^XZ command to be in valid ZPL II format.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

286

RFID Commands RFID Command Overview

RFID Command Overview

In addition to reading or encoding RFID tags, the RFID ZPL commands also provide for RFID exception handling, such as setting the number of read/write retries before declaring a transponder defective (set with ^RR, ^RT, and ^WT) or setting the number of labels that will be attempted if an error occurs (set with ^RS). For example, if an RFID label fails to program correctly or if the transponder cannot be detected, the printer ejects the label and prints VOID across it. The printer will try to print another label with the same data and format for the number of RFID labels specified by the ^RS command. If the problem persists, the printer follows the error handling instructions specified by the ^RS command: the printer may remove the problematic format from the print queue and proceed with the next format (if one exists in the buffer), or it may place the printer in Pause or Error mode.
Important Consider the following before using any command in this section:

Each command lists the printers that support it. Before using a particular command, verify that your printer is listed. If a parameter in the following tables is designated as not applicable for a particular printer, any value entered for the parameter will be ignored, but the place holder for the field is required.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

RFID Commands ^HR

287

^HR
Calibrate RFID Transponder Position
Description This command initiates an RFID transponder calibration for a specific RFID label and returns the results to the host computer. This calibration is used to determine the optimal programming position for RFID media that may not meet the transponder placement specifications for the printer.
Note Do not perform transponder calibration for RFID media that meets the transponder

placement specifications for your printer. Doing so will slow the printers throughput unnecessarily. To order media that is designed for use with your RFID printer, contact your authorized Zebra reseller. During transponder calibration, the printer feeds the RFID label one-dot row at a time while taking readings (via the READ TAG command and the WRITE TAG commands) to profile the RFID transponder. Based on the results, the printer determines the optimal programming position for the label and returns a results table to the host. The calibrated value is used as the programming position for the ^RS command, can be overwritten by the ^RS command, and is saved to nonvolatile memory (the value is saved even if the power is turned off). This calibration takes into account the print mode, backfeed mode, and tear off position. The RUN option in the RFID TAG CALIB control panel parameter performs the same calibration but does not create a results table.
Important If a label format specifies a value for parameter p (read/write position of the

transponder) in the ^RS command, that value will be used for the programming position for all RFID labels until a new position is specified or until the printer is turned Off (O) and then back On (I). Table 13 Printers That Support ^HR
Printer

Firmware Version

Supported?

R110Xi/R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus

R60.13.X R62.13.X R63.13.X SP920X SP994X

Yes Yes Yes No Yes

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

288

RFID Commands ^HR

Format ^HRa,b This table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

a = start string

User text to appear before the results table. Accepted values: any string less than 65 characters Default value: start User text to appear after the results table. Accepted values: any string less than 65 characters Default value: end

b = end string

Comments Based on the recommended transponder placement position for most RFID labels, the printers default RFID programming position is zero for the R110PAX4. For other RFID printers, the default programming position is the label length minus 1 mm (0.04 in.). To return to the default programming position at any time, use the RESTORE option in the RFID TAG CALIB control panel parameter. At the end of calibration, a results table is returned to the host. Each line in the results table appears as: Row, Read Result, Write Result where Row = the dot row where calibration occurred Read Result = results of calibration (R = read, = unable to read) Write Result = results of calibration (W = write, = unable to write)

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

RFID Commands ^HR

289

Example If the following command is sent to the printer:

^XA^HR^XZ
The printer starts the transponder calibration and returns a results table such as the following:

start position=195 215, , 214, , 213, , 212, , 211, , 210, ,W 209,R, 208, , 207, , 206, ,W 205,R, 204, , 203, , 202, ,W 201,R,W 200,R,W 199,R,W 198,R,W 197,R,W 196,R,W 195,R,W <---**** 194,R,W 193,R,W 192,R,W 191,R,W 190,R,W 189,R, 188, , 187, , 186, , 185, , . . . end
In this example, the optimal programming position is 195. This is identified at the top of the table (position=195) and with an the arrow (<---****) in the table.

Table 14 Printers That Support ^HV

Printer

Firmware Version

Supported?

R110Xi/R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus

R60.13.X R62.13.X R63.13.X SP920X SP994X

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

290

RFID Commands ^RA

^RA
Read AFI Byte
Description This command is used to read the AFI byte. The data can be sent back to the host via the ^HV command. Table 15 Printers That Support ^RA
Printer

Firmware Version

Supported?

R110Xi/R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus R110XiIIIPlus

R60.13.X R62.13.X R63.13.X SP920X SP994X SP936I SP939A

No No No No No No Yes

Format ^RA#,f,r,m This table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

# = field number specified with another command f = format

The value assigned to this parameter should be the same as the one used in the ^RT command. Accepted values: 0 to 9999 Default value: 0 Accepted values: 0 = ASCII 1 = Hexadecimal Default value: 0

r = number of retries Accepted values: 0 to 10 Default value: 0 m = motion

Accepted values: 0 = Feed label after writing. 1 = No Feed after writing. Other ZPL may cause a feed. Default value: 0

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

RFID Commands ^RA

291

Example This example reads the AFI byte in ASCII format and returns AFI Byte:x to the host. The printer will retry the command five times if necessary. A voided label is generated if the read is unsuccessful after these retries. The data read will go into the ^FN1 location of the recalled format.

^XA ^FO20,120^A0N,60^FN1^FS ^RA1,0,5,0^FS ^HV1,,AFI Byte:^FS ^XZ

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

292

RFID Commands ^RB

^RB
Define EPC Data Structure
Description This command defines the structure of EPC data, which can be read from or written to an RFID transponder. For more information about EPC specifications, refer to the EPC Global web site. RFID transponders can have different partitions defined. This command specifies the number of partitions and how many bits are in each partition.
Important All parameters in this command are persistent and will be used in subsequent formats if not provided. The values are initially set to the default values.

Table 16 Printers That Support ^RB

Printer

Firmware Version

Supported?

R110Xi/R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus

R60.13.X R62.13.X R63.13.X SP920X SP994X

Yes Yes Yes No Yes

Format ^RBn,p0,p1,p2, ..., p15 This table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

n = total bit size of the field p1 ... p15 = partition sizes

Accepted values: 1 to n, where n is the bit size of the tag. Default value: 96 Specify each partition size. These must add up to the total bit size. Accepted values: 1 to 64 bit total bit size Default value: 1

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

RFID Commands ^RB

293

Example 1 The following command specifies that there are 96 bits used with three fields. Fields 1, 2, and 3 contain 10, 26, and 60 bits, respectively.

^RB96,10,26,60
The ZPL code to write to a tag with this format would look like this:

^RFW,E^FD1000.67108000.1122921504606846976^FS
When writing to the tag, the data will be stored in the tag in the following way: Field 1 contains 1000. This value is stored in the first 10 bits Field 2 contains 67108000. This value is stored in the next 26 bits. Field 3 contains 1122921504606846976. This value is stored in the remaining 60 bits.
Example 2 The following command specifies that there are 64 bits used with eight 8-bit

fields.

^RB64,8,8,8,8,8,8,8,8^FS
The ZPL code to write to a tag with this format would look like this:

^RFW,E^FD1.123.160.200.249.6.1.0^FS
When writing to the tag, each set of data is written in its respective 8-bit field.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

294

RFID Commands ^RB

Example 3 This example uses the SGTIN-64 standard, which defines 64-bit structure in the following way:
Header SGTIN-64 2 bits 10 (binary value) Filter Value 3 bits 8 (decimal capacity) Company Prefix Index 14 bits 16,383 (decimal capacity) Item Reference 20 bits 9 to 1,048,575 (decimal capacity*) Serial Number 25 bits 33,554,431 (decimal capacity)

* Capacity of Item Reference field varies with the length of the company prefix.

The ZPL code to write to a tag with this format would look like this:

^XA ^RB64,2,3,14,20,25 ^RFW,E^FD0,3,12345,544332,22335221^FS ^XZ

These commands would put 0 in the header 3 as the filter value 12345 as the company prefix 544332 as the item reference 22335221 as the serial number To read this EPC data and print the results on the label, you would use the following code:

^XA ^RB64,2,3,14,20,25 ^FO50,50^A0N,40^FN0^FS ^FN0^RFR,E^FS ^XZ

The resulting label would look like this:
0.3.12345.544332.22335221

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

RFID Commands ^RE

295

^RE
Enable/Disable E.A.S. Bit
Description This command is used to enable or disable the E.A.S. bit that is available in some ISO15693 tags (such as Philips). This command works only on those ISO15693 transponders and will be ignored if the tag does not support E.A.S. Table 17 Printers That Support ^RE
Printer

Firmware Version

Supported?

R110Xi/R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus R110XiIIIPlus

R60.13.X R62.13.X R63.13.X SP920X SP994X SP936I SP939A

No No No No No No Yes

Format ^REt,r The following table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

= Enable/disable the E.A.S. bit in the ISO15693 transponder

Accepted values: N = Disable E.A.S. Y = Enable E.A.S. Default value: N Accepted values: 0 to 10 Default value: 0

r = number of retries

Example This example enables the E.A.S. bit in the transponder. It will retry the command

five times if necessary.

^XA ^REy,5 ^XZ

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

296

RFID Commands ^RF

^RF
Read or Write RFID Format
Description This command allows you to read or write to an RFID tag.
Note When using this command to read a tag, you may use a field variable to print the tag

data on the label or to return the data to the host. Table 18 Printers That Support ^RF
Printer

Firmware Version

Supported?

R110Xi/R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus

R60.13.X R62.13.X R63.13.X SP920X SP994X

Yes Yes Yes No Yes

Format ^RFo,t,b,n This table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

o = operation

The action to be performed. Accepted values: W = write to the tag L = write with LOCK (if supported by tag type; Gen 2 does not use this locking function) R = read the tag Default value: W Accepted values: A = ASCII H = Hexadecimal E = EPC (ensure proper setup with the ^RB command) Default value: H Accepted values: 0 to n, where n is the maximum number of blocks for the tag. Default value: 0

t = type

b = starting block number

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

RFID Commands ^RF

297

Parameters

Details

n = number of bytes to read or write

Note This parameter is used only by the R4Mplus with

firmware version SP994X (R4Mplus European version). This parameter applies only when the starting block number is 1. Accepted values: 1 to n, where n is the maximum number of bytes for the tag. For UCODE EPC 1.19, n is 32. Default value: 1

Examples Write ASCII

This example writes 96-bit data.

^XA ^RS4 ^RFw,a^FD00 my data^FS ^XZ

Write Hex

This example writes 64-bit data.

^XA ^RS3 ^RFW,H^FD1122334455667788^FS ^XZ

Write EPC

This example writes 96-bit data, as specified by the ^RB command.

^XA ^RB96,8,3,3,20,24,38 ^RFw,e^FD16,3,5,78742,146165,1234567891^FS ^XZ

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

298

RFID Commands ^RI

^RI
Get RFID Tag ID
Description This command is used get the unique serial number of the tag. The serial number is returned in hexadecimal format. Table 19 Printers That Support ^RI
Printer

Firmware Version

Supported?

R110Xi/R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus R110XiIIIPlus

R60.13.X R62.13.X R63.13.X SP920X SP994X SP936I SP939A

No No No No No No Yes

Format ^RI#,s,r,m This table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

# = number to be assigned to the field s = specify data order

Accepted values: 0 to 9999 Default value: 0 Accepted values: 0 = MSB first for Tag*It and PicoTag. LSB first for I*code and ISO15693 1 = Reverse the data order Default value: 0

r = number of retries Accepted values: 0 to 10 Default value: 0 m = motion

Accepted values: 0 = Feed label after writing. 1 = No Feed after writing. Other ZPL may cause a feed. Default value: 0

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

RFID Commands ^RI

299

Example This example reads a tag ID, prints it on a label, and sends string

Tag ID:xxxxxxxx to the host. The data read will go into the ^FN0 location of the format. The printer will retry the command five times, if necessary. ^XA ^FO20,120^A0N,60^FN0^FS ^RI0,,5^FS ^HV0,,Tag ID:^FS ^XZ

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

300

RFID Commands ^RM

^RM
Enable RFID Motion
Description This command enables or disables RFID motion. By default, labels automatically print at the end of the format. This command allows you to inhibit the label from actually moving when it reaches the program position, which is useful for debugging, setup, and custom applications. This parameter is not persistent (carried over from label to label). Table 20 Printers That Support ^RM
Printer

Firmware Version

Supported?

R110Xi/R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus

R60.13.X R62.13.X R63.13.X SP920X SP994X

Yes Yes Yes No Yes

Format ^RMe This table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

e = enable

Accepted values: Y = Yes, move the label N = No, do not move the label Default value: Y

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL II Commands for RFID ^RN

301

^RN
Detect Multiple RFID Tags in Encoding Field
Description This command enables or disables detection of multiple RFID tags in the encoding field. By default, the printer checks for more than one tag in the field before attempting to read or write. If more than one tag is found, the label over the antenna support is voided, and the RFID ERR STATUS parameter on the control panel displays MULTIPLE TAGS. To speed up printing and encoding by up to 200 ms, the check may be disabled. This parameter is persistent (carried over from label to label). Table 21 Printers That Support ^RN
Printer

Firmware Version

Supported?

R110Xi/R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus

R60.13.X R62.13.X R63.13.X SP920X SP994X

Yes (R60.13.03 or higher) Yes Yes No No

Format ^RNe The following table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

e = enable

Accepted Values: Y = Yes, check for multiple tags N = No, do not check for multiple tags Default Value: Y

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

302

ZPL II Commands for RFID ~RO

~RO
Reset Advanced Counters
Description The ~RO command resets the advanced counters used by the printer to monitor label generation in inches and centimeters, the number of labels printed, and the number of valid and voided RFID labels. Any single error during programming of an RFID tag will result in that label being considered void by the counter. Four resettable counters are available. The values for the counters are displayed on the printer configuration label.
Note For the R4Mplus, the counter values are not saved, so power cycling the printer resets

all counters to zero. Table 22 Printers That Support ~RO

Printer

Firmware Version

Supported?

R110Xi/R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus

R60.13.X R62.13.X R63.13.X SP920X SP994X

Yes Yes Yes No Yes

Format ~ROc This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

c = counter to reset

Accepted Values: 1 = counter 1 2 = counter 2 3 = valid RFID label counter 4 = voided RFID label counter Default Value: None. If a value is not specified, the command is ignored.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL II Commands for RFID ~RO

303

Example 1 This example shows how the counter portion of the printer configuration labels looks when counter 1 is reset by sending ~RO1. Before

After

Example 2 This example shows how the counter portion of the printer configuration labels

looks when the RFID counters are reset by sending ~RO3 and ~RO4.
Before

After

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

304

ZPL II Commands for RFID ^RR

^RR
Specify RFID Retries for a Block
Description This command changes the number of times that the printer attempts to read or write to a particular block of a single RFID tag. By default, the printer will attempt six retries. This command is persistent and will be used in subsequent formats if not provided.
Important This commands function is different than the number of labels parameter in the ^RS command.

Table 23 Printers That Support ^RR

Printer

Firmware Version

Supported?

R110Xi/R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus

R60.13.X R62.13.X R63.13.X SP920X SP994X

Yes Yes Yes No Yes

Format ^RRn This table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

n = number of retries Accepted values: 0 to 10 Default value: 0

Examples

Set read block retries to 5

^XA ^FN1^RR5^RFR,H^FS ^HV1^FS ^XZ

Set write block retries to 2

^XA ^RR2^RFW,H^FD1234^FS ^XZ

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL II Commands for RFID ^RS

305

^RS
RFID Setup
Description This command sets up parameters including tag type, read/write position of the transponder, and error handling.
Important Use care when using this command in combination with ^RT or ^RF for

reading tag data. Problems can occur if the data read from the tag is going to be printed on the label. Any data read from the transponder must be positioned to be printed above the read/write position. Failure to do this will prevent read data from being printed on the label. Table 24 Printers That Support ^RS
Printer

Firmware Version

Supported?

R110Xi/R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus

R60.13.X R62.13.X R63.13.X SP920X SP994X

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Format ^RSt,p,v,n,e,a,c,s This table identifies the parameters for this format.

Parameters

Details

t = tag type

Important Some countries restrict the frequencies that can be used for RFID, so your printer may not support all of the tag types listed. If you specify an unsupported tag type, the printer uses the default value.

For the R110Xi/R170Xi: Accepted Values: 0 = None 1 = EPC Class 0 2 = EPC Class 0 Plus 3 = EPC Class 1 64-bit 4 = EPC Class 1 96-bit 5 = ISO 18000-06B 6 = Impinj Class 0 Plus 8 = EPC Class 1, Generation 2 (Gen 2) Default value: 4 (continued on next page)

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

306

ZPL II Commands for RFID ^RS

Parameters

Details

t = tag type

(continued from previous page) Important Some countries restrict the frequencies that can be used for RFID, so your printer may not support all of the tag types listed. If you specify an unsupported tag type, the printer uses the default value. For the R4Mplus with firmware version SP920H or higher (U.S. version): Accepted Values: 3 = EPC Class 1 64-bit 4 = EPC Class 1 96-bit Default value: 4 For the R4Mplus with firmware version SP994X (European version): Accepted Values: 3 = EPC Class 1 64-bit 4 = EPC Class 1 96-bit 5 = ISO 18000-06B 96-bit 7 = ISO 18000-06A (read only) 8 = EPC Class 1, Generation 2 (Gen 2) Default value: 5 For all other supported printers: Accepted Values: 0 = None 1 = EPC Class 0 2 = EPC Class 0 Plus 3 = EPC Class 1 64-bit 4 = EPC Class 1 96-bit 5 = ISO 18000-06B 6 = Impinj Class 0 Plus 7 = ISO 18000-06A 8 = EPC Class 1, Generation 2 (Gen 2) Default value: 4

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL II Commands for RFID ^RS

307

Parameters

Details

p = read/write position of the transponder

Sets the read/write position of the transponder in vertical (Y axis) dot rows from the top of the label. Set to 0 (no movement) if the transponder is already in the effective area without moving the media. Important If a label format specifies a value for this parameter, this value will be used for the programming position for all labels until a new position is specified or until the printer is powered Off (O) and then back On (I). Accepted values: 0 to label length Default value: For the R110PAX4: 0 For all other supported printers: label length minus 1 mm (1/16 in.) Sets the length of the void printout in vertical (Y axis) dot rows. Accepted values: 0 to label length Default value: label length The number of labels that will be attempted in case of read/encode failure. Accepted values: 1 to 10 Default value: 3 If an error persists after the specified number of labels are tried, perform this error handling action. Accepted values: N = No action (printer drops the label format causing the error and moves to the next queued label) P = Place printer in Pause mode (label format stays in the queue until the user cancels) E = Place printer in Error mode (label format stays in the queue until the user cancels) Default value: N Note You can set the printer to send an error message to the host for each failure. To enable or disable this unsolicited error message, refer to the ^SX and ^SQ ZPL commands. Use V for the condition type for an RFID error.

v = length of void printout n = number of labels

e = error handling

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

308

ZPL II Commands for RFID ^RS

Parameters

Details

a = signals on applicator

Note For the R4Mplus, this parameter applies only to

printers with firmware version SP994X (R4Mplus European version). When the value for parameter p (read/write position of the transponder) is nonzero, this parameter changes the number of start and stop print signals required for printing. In Single mode, one start print command is required. In Double mode, two are required, so the printer will resume printing only after the second start print command is received. Accepted values: S = single signal D = double signal (For the R110PAX4, Double mode will work only if the read/write position is changed from the default of zero.) Default value: S

c = certify tag with a pre-read s = void print speed

Not applicable.
Note For the R4Mplus, this parameter applies only to

printers with firmware version SP994X (R4Mplus European version). If a label is voided, the speed at which VOID will be printed across the label. Accepted values: any valid print speed Default value: the printers maximum print speed

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL II Commands for RFID ^RS

309

Example 1 This example sets the printer to move the media to 800 dots from the top of the

media [or label length minus 800 from the bottom (leading edge) of the media] and voids the rest of the media in case of an error. The printer will try to print two labels and then will pause if printing and encoding fail.

^XA ^RS,800,,2,P^FS ^XZ

Figure 3 shows the resulting voided label. Note where the void starts. The media has been moved 800 dot rows from the top of the label (label length minus 800 dot rows from the bottom (leading edge) of a label) to bring the transponder into the effective area to read/write a tag. If the printer fails the operation, the rest of the media is voided. Figure 3 Sample Void Label, Remainder of Label Voided
Top of label

800 dot rows

Start of RFID operation

Label length minus 800 dot rows

Bottom of label

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

310

ZPL II Commands for RFID ^RS

Example 2 This example sets the printer to move the media to 800 dots from the top of the

media [or label length - 500 from the bottom (leading edge) of the media] and prints VOID 500 dots in vertical length (Y axis) in case of an error.

^XA ^RS,800,500,2,P^FS ^XZ

Figure 4 shows the resulting voided label. Note where the void starts. The media has been moved 800 dot rows from the top of the label [label length minus 800 dot rows from the bottom (leading edge) of a label] to bring the transponder into the effective area to read/write a tag. If the printer fails the operation, an area that is 500 dot rows of the media is voided instead of the entire rest of the media. Figure 4 Sample Void Label, 500 Dot Row Area Voided
Top of label

800 dot rows

500 dot rows

Start of RFID operation

Label length minus 800 dot rows

Bottom of label

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL II Commands for RFID ^RT

311

^RT
Read RFID Tag
Description This command tells the printer to read the current RFID tag data. The data can be sent back to the host via the ^HV command. Table 25 Printers That Support ^RT
Printer

Firmware Version

Supported?

R110Xi/R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus

R60.13.X R62.13.X R63.13.X SP920X SP994X

Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes Yes*

* It is recommended that you use the ^RF, ^RM, and ^RR commands rather than the ^RT command. The ^RT command is provided only for backward-compatibility with label formats that were developed for older Zebra RFID printers. Format ^RT#,b,n,f,r,m,s This table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

# = number to be assigned to the field b = starting block number

Accepted values: 0 to 9999 Default value: 0 Accepted values: 0 to n, where n is the maximum number of blocks for the tag. Default value: 0

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

312

ZPL II Commands for RFID ^RT

Parameters

Details

n = number of blocks/bytes to read

Note This parameter does NOT apply to R4Mplus

printers with firmware version SP920X (R4Mplus U.S. version). For R4Mplus printers with firmware version SP994X (European version): This parameter applies only when the starting block number (parameter b) is 1. Accepted values: 1 to n, where n is the maximum number of bytes for the tag. For UCODE EPC 1.19, n is 32. Default value: 1 For all other supported printers: Accepted values: 1 to n, where n is the maximum number of blocks for the tag type minus the starting block number. For example, if the tag has 8 blocks (starting with block 0) and you start with block 6, n can be 2. This would return block 6 and block 7 information. Default value: 1

f = format

Accepted values: 0 = ASCII 1 = Hexadecimal Default value: 0

r = number of retries Changes the number of times that the printer attempts to read a particular block of a single RFID tag. (Same retry rules as the ^RR command.) Accepted values: 0 to 10 Default value: 0 m = motion
Enables or disables RFID motion for the current field. Accepted values: 0 = Feed label after writing. 1 = No feed after writing. Other ZPL may cause a feed. Default value: 0
Note This parameter applies only to R4Mplus printers

s = special mode

with firmware version SP920X (R4Mplus U.S. version). For EPC Class 1 (Alien reader) only. Not applicable for EPC class 0. Default value: 0 Accepted values: 0 = Do not read if mismatched checksum 1 = Read even if mismatched checksum

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL II Commands for RFID ^RT

313

Example This sample reads a tag, prints the data on a label, and sends the string

Tag Data:xxxxxxxx back to the host. The data read will go into the ^FN1 location of the format. The printer will retry the command five times, if necessary. ^XA ^FO20,120^A0N,60^FN1^FS ^RT1,,,,5^FS ^HV1,,Tag Data:^FS ^XZ

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

314

ZPL II Commands for RFID ^RW

^RW
Set RFID Read and Write Power Levels
Description This command sets the read and write power levels. This function is useful when using different tag types or transponders that require different power levels to obtain the best read and write abilities. Table 26 Printers That Support ^RW
Printer

Firmware Version

Supported?

R110Xi/R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus

R60.13.X R62.13.X R63.13.X SP920X SP994X

Yes Yes Yes No Yes

Format ^RWr,w This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Parameters Details

r = read power

Sets the power level to match the desired output as calibrated in the factory. Accepted Values: H = high M = medium L = low Default Value: H Sets the power level to match the desired output as calibrated in the factory. Accepted Values: H = high M = medium L = low Default Value: H

w = write power

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL II Commands for RFID ^RZ

315

^RZ
Set RFID Tag Password
Description This command lets you define the password for the tag during writing.
Important Only certain tags support this feature, so check to ensure that this command can be used with your particular tag type.

Table 27 Printers That Support ^RW

Printer

Firmware Version

Supported?

R110Xi/R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus

R60.13.X R62.13.X R63.13.X SP920X SP994X

Yes Yes Yes No No

Format ^RZp The following table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

p = password

Accepted values: 00 to FF (hexadecimal) Default value: 00

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

316

ZPL II Commands for RFID ^WF

^WF
Write AFI Byte
Description This command is used to write the AFI byte to a transponder. Error handling is set by the ^RS command. Table 28 Printers That Support ^WF
Printer

Firmware Version

Supported?

R110Xi/R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus R110XiIIIPlus

R60.13.X R62.13.X R63.13.X SP920X SP994X SP936I SP939A

No No No No No No Yes

Format ^WFr,m,w,f The following table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

r = number of retries Accepted values: 0 to 10 Default value: 0 m = motion

Accepted values: 0 = Feed label after writing. 1 = No Feed after writing. Other ZPL may cause a feed. Default value: 0 Accepted values: 0 = Not write protected 1 = Write protect Default value: 0 Accepted values: 0 = ASCII 1 = Hexadecimal Default value: 0

w = write protect

f = data format

Example 1 This example encodes data R (hex 52) as the AFI byte. The printer will try

the command up to five times, if necessary.

^XA ^WF5^FDR ^XZ

45541L-003 Rev. A ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware 6/9/06

ZPL II Commands for RFID ^WF

317

Example 2 This example encodes data hex 66 as the AFI byte. The printer will try the

command up to five times, if necessary.

^XA ^WF5,,,1^FD66 ^XZ

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

318

ZPL II Commands for RFID ^WT

^WT
Write Tag
Description This command allows you to program the current RFID tag.
Important Check the amount of data memory available for the tag that you will be using. If

more data is sent than the memory can hold, the printer truncates the data. Table 29 Printers That Support ^WT
Printer

Firmware Version

Supported?

R110Xi/R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus

R60.13.X R62.13.X R63.13.X SP920X SP994X

Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes Yes* **

* It is recommended that you use the ^RF, ^RM, ^RR, and ^WV commands rather than the ^WT command. The ^WT command is provided only for backward-compatibility with label formats that were developed for older Zebra RFID printers. ** With this command, you can write 12 bytes (96 bits) to block 0, but you can write only the first byte of block 1.

Format ^WTb,r,m,w,f,v This table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

b = block number

Note For the R4Mplus, this parameter applies only to

printers with firmware version SP994X (R4Mplus European version). This parameter is tag-dependent. For most tags, use block 0. For EPC Class 0 Plus, block 0 is EPC data, and block 1 is user data. Accepted values: 0 to n, where n is the maximum number of blocks for the tag. Default value: 0

r = number of retries Changes the number of times that the printer attempts to write to a particular block of a single RFID tag. (Same function as the ^RR command.) Accepted values: 0 to 10 Default value: 0

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZPL II Commands for RFID ^WT

319

Parameters

Details

m = motion

Enables or disables RFID motion. (Same function as the ^RM command.) Accepted values: 0 = Feed label after writing 1 = No feed after writing (other ZPL may cause a feed) Default value: 0 Accepted values: 0 = Not write protected 1 = Write protected Default value: 0 Accepted values: 0 = ASCII 1 = Hexadecimal Default value: 0 For reliability, some manufacturers encode tags with known data (such as A5A5). This parameter flags whether the preprogrammed data is verified. (Same function as the ^WV command) Accepted values: N = Do not verify Y = Verify valid data before writing Default value: N Not applicable.

w = write protect

f = data format

v = verify valid data

v = reverse the data order

Example This sample encodes data RFIDRFID and will try writing up to five times, if

necessary.

^XA ^WT,5^FDRFIDRFID^FS ^XZ

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

320

ZPL II Commands for RFID ^WV

^WV
Verify RFID Write Operation
Description If write verify is enabled, this command verifies the RFID write operation to ensure that the tag about to be programmed contains the hex data A5A5 in the first two bytes. This parameter is not persistent (carried over from label to label). Table 30 Printers That Support ^WV
Printer

Firmware Version

Supported?

R110Xi/R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus

R60.13.X R62.13.X R63.13.X SP920X SP994X

Yes Yes Yes No Yes

Format ^WVe This table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

e = enable

Accepted values: Y or N Default value: N

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

4
Wireless Print Server Commands

This section contains new or modified ZPL commands for the Wireless Print Server.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

322

Wireless Print Server Commands ^NB

^NB
Search for Wired Print Server during Network Boot
Description Use this command to tell the printer whether to search for a wired print server at bootup. Table 31 shows the results of this check. Table 31 Results of Check for Wired Print Server
Wired Print Server Connected? Check for Wired Print Server?
Results

Yes

Skip

The printer does not check for or acknowledge the wired print server. The Wireless Print Server is used as the primary print server. The printer checks for a wired print server. If the printer detects the wired print server, it uses it as the primary print server. If the printer does not detect the wired print server, the Wireless Print Server is used as the primary print server. The printer does not check for a wired print server. The Wireless Print Server is used as the primary print server. During bootup, the printer tries for 70 seconds to detect a wired print server. Because a wired print server is not connected, the printer uses the Wireless Print Server as the primary print server.

Yes

Check

Skip

Check

Format ^NBa The following table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

a = check for wired print server at boot time

Accepted Values: C (CHECK), S (SKIP CHECK) Default Value: S

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

Wireless Print Server Commands ^NN

323

^NN
Set SNMP
Description Use this command to set the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) parameters. Format ^NNa,b,c,d,e,f The following table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

a = system name b = system contact c = system location d = get community name e = set community name f = trap community name

Same as printer name. Accepted Values: Up to 17 alphanumeric characters Any contact information as desired (such as a name or phrase) Accepted Values: Up to 50 alphanumeric characters The printers model information. Accepted Values: Up to 50 alphanumeric characters Accepted Values: Up to 19 alphanumeric characters Default Value: public Accepted Values: Up to 19 alphanumeric characters Default Value: public Accepted Values: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters Default Value: public

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

324

Wireless Print Server Commands ^NP

^NP
Set Primary/Secondary Device
Description Use this command to specify whether to use the printers or the print servers LAN/WLAN settings at boot time. The default is to use the printers settings. When the printer is set as the primary device, you can set it up using ZPL commands or the SetWLAN utility, and any wired print server inserted into the printer will get these settings. Format ^NPa The following table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

a = device to use as primary

Accepted Values: P (PRINTER), M (MPS/PRINTSERVER)

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

328

Wireless Print Server Commands ^WA

^WA
Set Antenna Parameters
Description Use this command to set the values for the receive and transmit antenna. Format ^WAa,b The following table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

a = receive antenna b = transmit antenna

Accepted Values: D (Diversity), L (Left), R (Right) Default Value: D Accepted Values: D (Diversity), L (Left), R (Right) Default Value: D

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

Wireless Print Server Commands ^WE

329

^WE
Set WEP Mode
Description Use this command to command enable Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) mode and set WEP values. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (WLANs). Use care to include the exact number of commas required for this command when setting encryption keys (parameters e through h). A missing or extra comma will cause the keys to be stored in the wrong slots and can disable the wireless system. Format ^WEa,b,c,d,e,f,g,h The following table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

a = encryption mode

Accepted Values: OFF, 40 (40-bit encryption), 128 (128-bit encryption) Default Value: OFF Tells the printer which encryption key to use. Accepted Values: 1 (Key 1), 2 (Key 2), 3 (Key 3), 4 (Key 4) Default Value: 1 Accepted Values: O (Open System), S (Shared Key) Default Value: O Note If you enable Shared Key authentication with Encryption Mode set to OFF, this value resets to Open. Accepted Values: H (Hex key storage), S (string key storage) Default Value: H Accepted Values: The actual value for the encryption key The encryption mode affects what can be entered for the encryption keys: For 40-bit, encryption keys can be set to any 5 hex pairs or any 10 alphanumeric characters. For 128-bit, encryption keys can be set to any 13 hex pairs or any 26 alphanumeric characters. Note When using hex storage, do not add a leading 0x on the WEP key.

b = encryption index

c = authentication type

d = encryption key storage

e, f, g, h = encryption keys 1 through 4

Example 1 This example sets encryption to 40-bit, activates encryption key 1, and sets

encryption key 1 to the string 12345.

^WE40,,,,12345
In this example, the Encryption Index, Authentication Type, and Encryption Key Storage parameters are left blank with commas as placeholders for the fields. The printer uses the default values for these parameters.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

330

Wireless Print Server Commands ^WE

Example 2 This example sets encryption to 128-bit, activates encryption key 2, and sets encryption keys 1 and 2 to hex values.

^WE128,2,,H,12345678901234567890123456,98765432109876543 210987654
The value for encryption key 1 is stored and can be activated in the future by the following command:

^WE128,1
Example 3 This example sets encryption to 128-bit, activates encryption key 4, and sets encryption key 4 to a hex value.

^WE128,4,,H,,,,98765432109876543210987654
Values are not required for encryption keys 1 through 3 when setting encryption key 4. In this example, commas are used as placeholders for the fields for encryption keys 1 through 3. Any previously stored values for these encryption keys do not change. Important Make sure that you include the exact number of commas required to get to the slot for encryption key 4 (parameter h).

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

Wireless Print Server Commands ^WI

331

^WI
Change Wireless Network Settings
Description Use this command to change the wireless network settings. Format ^WIa,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i The following table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

a = IP resolution

b = IP address c = subnet mask d = default gateway e = WINS server address

f = connection Accepted Values: Y (YES), N (NO) timeout checking g = timeout value h = ARP broadcast interval i = base raw port number
Time, in seconds, before the connection times out. Accepted Values: 0 through 9999 Time, in minutes, that the broadcast is sent to update devices ARP cache. The port number that the printer should use for its RAW data. Accepted Values: 0 through 99999 Default Value: 9100

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

334

Wireless Print Server Commands ^WP

^WP
Set Wireless Password
Description Use this command to set the four-digit wireless password (not the same as the general printer password). If the wireless password is 0000, the Wireless Print Server runs in an unprotected mode, which means that you do not need to enter the wireless password through the control panel to view or modify wireless settings. If a wireless password is set, the values for the following parameters will not appear through the control panel until the wireless password is entered: MAC Address ESSID Leap Mode (if applicable) Reset Network Format ^WPa,b The following table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

a = old wireless password b = new wireless password

Accepted Values: 0000 through 9999 Default Value: 0000 Accepted Values: 0000 through 9999 Default Value: 0000

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

Wireless Print Server Commands ^WR

335

^WR
Set Transmit Rate
Description Use this command to change the transmission parameters. Format ^WRa,b,c,d,e The following table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details

a = rate 1 b = rate 2 c = rate 5.5 d = rate 11 e = transmit power

Sets the 1 Mb/s transmit rate. Accepted Values: Y (On), N (Off) Sets the 2 Mb/s transmit rate. Accepted Values: Y (On), N (Off) Sets the 5.5 Mb/s transmit rate. Accepted Values: Y (On), N (Off) Sets the 11 Mb/s transmit rate. Accepted Values: Y (On), N (Off) Accepted Values: 1, 5, 20, 30, 50, 100

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

336

Wireless Print Server Commands ~WR

This section provides you with a visual of the different Zebra Code pages.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

340

Zebra Code Pages Zebra Code Page 850

Zebra Code Page 850

This is the Zebra Code Page 850:
Note For hex 5C, a cent sign prints for all printer resident fonts. A backslash prints for

downloaded fonts.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

Zebra Code Pages Zebra Code Page 850

341

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

342

Zebra Code Pages Zebra Code Page 1252

Zebra Code Page 1252

45541L-003 Rev. A

346

ASCII ASCII Code Chart

ASCII Code Chart

Shaded areas in Table 32 indicate characters not recommended for command prefix, format prefix, or delimiter characters. Table 32 Zebra Used ASCII Code
HEX Character HEX Character HEX Character HEX Character

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D

NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D

Space ! # $ % & ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < =

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D

@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ]

60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D

a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { | }

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ASCII ASCII Code Chart

347

Table 32 Zebra Used ASCII Code (Continued)

HEX Character HEX Character HEX Character HEX Character

1E 1F

RS US

3E 3F

> ?

5E 5F

^ _

7E 7F

~ DEL

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

348

ASCII ASCII Code Chart

Notes ___________________________________________________________________

__

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

C
Fonts and Bar Codes

This section provides information about different fonts (type faces) and bar codes that can be used with the printer.

Contents
Standard Printer Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Proportional and Fixed Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scalable Versus Bitmapped Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scalable Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bitmapped Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 dot/mm printhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 dot/mm (203 dpi) printhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 dot/mm (300 dpi) printhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 dot/mm (600 dpi) printhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Format for Bar Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bar Code Field Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bar Code Command Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 351 352 352 352 354 354 354 355 355 356 356 357 358

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

350

Fonts and Bar Codes Standard Printer Fonts

Standard Printer Fonts

Most Zebra printers come standard with 15 bitmapped fonts and one scalable font, see Figure 6. Additional downloadable bitmapped and scalable fonts are also available. Character size and density (how dark it appears) depend on the density of the printhead and the media used. Figure 6 Examples of the Standard Printer Fonts

To use one of these fonts, you must either use the change alphanumeric default font command (^CF) or specify an alphanumeric field command (^A). The standard Zebra character set is Code 850 for character values greater than 20 HEX. There are six HEX character values below 20 HEX that are also recognized. Figure 7 shows how these character values are printed.

Note Unidentified characters should default to a space.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

Fonts and Bar Codes Proportional and Fixed Spacing

351

Figure 7 Recognized HEX Values below 20 HEX

Proportional and Fixed Spacing

Proportional spacing is different than fixed spacing. In Table 33, the intercharacter gap (space between characters) is constant for fonts A through H, which means that the spacing between all characters is the same. For example, the spacing between the letters MW is the same as between the letters IE. The baseline is the imaginary line on which the bottom (base) of all characters (except any descenders) rest. The area between the baseline and the bottom of the matrix is used for any character descenders. Baseline numbers define where the baseline is located in relationship to the top of the matrix. For example, the baseline for font E is 23 dots down from the top of the matrix. Table 33 Intercharacter Gap and Baseline Parameters
Font H x W (in dots) Type Intercharacter Gap (in dots) Baseline (in dots)

A B C,D E F G H GS 0

9x5 11 x 7 18 x 10 28 x 15 26 x 13 60 x 40 21 x 13 24 x 24 DEFAULT: 15 x 12

U-L-D U U-L-D OCR-B U-L-D U-L-D OCR-A SYMBOL

1 2 2 5 3 8 6 PROPORTIONAL PROPORTIONAL

7 11 14 23 21 48 21 3 x HEIGHT/4 3 x HEIGHT/4

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

352

Fonts and Bar Codes Scalable Versus Bitmapped Fonts

Scalable Versus Bitmapped Fonts

For scalable fonts, setting the height and width equally produces characters that appear the most balanced. Balanced characters are pleasing to the eye because actual height and width are approximately equal to each other. This is achieved through the use of a smooth-scaling algorithm in the printer. For bitmapped fonts, this balancing is built into the font. In actuality, the height of a bitmap font is slightly larger than the width. Bitmap fonts are always at the maximum size of the characters cell.

Scalable Fonts
All dot parameters used in the commands to create scalable fonts are translated into a point size because scalable fonts are measured in point sizes, not dots. To determine how many dots to enter to obtain a particular point size, use the following formula. The actual point size will be an approximate value.
Dots = (Point size) x (Dots per inch of Printer) 72

For printers using a 6 dot/mm printhead the dots per inch of printer value is 152.4 For printers using a 8 dot/mm printhead the dots per inch of printer value is 203.2 For printers using a 12 dot/mm printhead the dots per inch of printer value is 304.8 For printers using a 24 dot/mm printhead the dots per inch of printer value is 609.6 The actual height and width of the character in dots will vary, depending on the font style and the particular character. Therefore, some characters will be smaller and some will be larger than the actual dot size requested. The baselines for all scalable fonts are calculated against the dot size of the cell. The baseline is 3/4 down from the top of the cell. For example, if the size of the cell is 80 dots, the baseline will be 60 dots (3/4) down from the top of the cell. For more information concerning fonts and related commands, see ~DB on page 123 and ~DS on page 131.

Bitmapped Fonts
Internal bitmapped fonts can be magnified from 1 to 10 times their normal (default) size. The magnification factor is in whole numbers. Therefore, if the normal size of a bitmapped font is 9 dots high and 5 dots wide, a magnification factor of 3 would produce a character of 27 dots high and 15 dots wide. Height and width can be magnified independently.

Magnification Factor
The font commands contain parameters for entering the height and width of printed characters. The values are always entered in dots. When entering these values for bitmapped fonts, use the following formula: Base Height x Magnification Factor = Height Parameter Value

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

Fonts and Bar Codes Scalable Versus Bitmapped Fonts

353

The same principle applies when calculating width. Example: Base height = 9 dots Base width = 5 dots To magnify a bitmapped character with the above specifics 3 times its size: Height parameter = 27 [9 x 3] Width parameter = 15 [5 x 3]

Changing Bitmapped Font Size

Alphanumeric field command (^A) parameters h and w control the magnification and, therefore, the ultimate size of the font. The parameter is specified in dots, but ZPL II actually uses an integer multiplier times the original height/width of the font. For example, if you specify

^AD,54
you get characters three times their normal size (54 dots high), but if you specify

^AD,52
you receive the same result, not characters 52 dots high. Defining only the height or width of a bitmapped font forces the magnification to be proportional to the parameter defined. If neither is defined, the ^CF height and width are used. For example, if the height is twice the standard height, the width will be twice the standard width.

Example If a ^CF command, with height and width parameters defined, is used to set the first font, any ^A commands (to select a different font) that follow must have the height and width parameter filled in.

If this is not done, the newly selected font will be magnified using values for the ^CF height and width parameters. This is an example of what happens:.
ZPL II CODE
^XA^LL1800 ^FO50,50^CFD,26,10^FDZEBRA....^FS ^FO50,100^FD"Bar Code, Bar None"^FS ^FO50,200^AA^FDZEBRA....^FS ^FO50,250^FD"Bar Code, Bar None"^FS ^XZ

GENERATED LABEL

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

354

Fonts and Bar Codes Font Matrices

Font Matrices
Type Key U = Uppercase, L = Lowercase, D = Descenders

6 dot/mm printhead
Matrix Font HxW (in dots) Type HxW (in in.) Char./in. HxW (in mm) Char. /mm Character Size

A B C, D E F G H GS 0

9x5 11 x 7 18 x 10 21 x 10 26 x 13 60 x 40 17 x 11 24 x 24 Default: 15 x 12

U-L-D U U-L-D OCR-B U-L-D U-L-D OCR-A SYMBOL

0.059 x 0.039 0.072 x 0.059 0.118 x 0.079 0.138 x 0.085 0.170 x 0.105 0.394 x 0.315 0.111 x 0.098 0.157 x 0.157

25.4 16.9 12.7 11.7 9.53 3.18 10.2 6.35

1.50 x 0.99 1.82 x 1.50 2.99 x 2.00 3.50 x 2.16 4.32 x 2.67 10.0 x 8.00 2.81 x 2.48 3.98 x 3.98

1.01 0.066 0.05 0.46 0.37 0.125 0.40 0.251

8 dot/mm (203 dpi) printhead

Matrix Font HxW (in dots) Type HxW (in in.) Char./in. HxW (in mm) Char. /mm Character Size

A B C, D E F G H GS P Q R S T U V 0

9X5 11 X 7 18 X 10 28 x 15 26 x 13 60 x 40 21 x 13 24 x 24 20 x 18 28 x 24 35 x 31 40 x 35 48 x 42 59 x 53 80 x 71 Default: 15 x 12

U-L-D U U-L-D OCR-B U-L-D U-L-D OCR-A SYMBOL U-L-D U-L-D U-L-D U-L-D U-L-D U-L-D U-L-D U-L-D

0.044 x 0.030 0.054 x 0.044 0.089 x 0.059 0.138 x 0.098 0.128 x 0.079 0.295 x 0.197 0.103 x 0.093 0.118 x 0.118 0.098 x 0.089 0.138 x 0.118 0.172 x 0.153 0.197 x 0.172 0.236 x 0.207 0.290 x 0.261 0.394 x 0.349 Scalable

33.3 22.7 16.9 10.2 12.7 4.2 10.8 8.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1.12 x 0.76 1.37 x 1.12 2.26 x 1.12 3.50 x 2.49 3.25 x 2.00 7.49 x 5.00 2.61 x 2.36 2.99 x 2.99 2.50 x 2.25 3.50 x 3.00 4.38 x 3.88 5.00 x 4.38 6.00 x 5.25 7.38 x 6.63 10.00 x 8.88 Scalable

1.31 0.89 0.66 0.40 0.50 0.167 0.423 0.334 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

Fonts and Bar Codes Font Matrices

355

12 dot/mm (300 dpi) printhead

Matrix Font HxW (in dots) Type HxW (in in.) Char./in. HxW (in mm) Char. /mm Character Size

A B C, D E F G H GS P Q R S T U V 0

9X5 11 X 7 18 X 10 42 x 20 26 x 13 60 x 40 34 x 22 24 x 24 20 x 18 28 x 24 35 x 31 40 x 35 48 x 42 59 x 53 80 x 71 Default: 15 x 12

U-L-D U U-L-D OCR-B U-L-D U-L-D OCR-A SYMBOL U-L-D U-L-D U-L-D U-L-D U-L-D U-L-D U-L-D U-L-D

0.030 x 0.020 0.036 x 0.030 0.059 x 0.040 0.138 x 0.085 0.085 x 0.053 0.197 x 0.158 0.111 x 0.098 0.079 x 0.079 0.067 x 0.060 0.093 x 0.080 0.117 x 0.103 0.133 x 0.177 0.160 x 0.140 0.197 x 0.177 0.267 x 0.237 Scalable

50.8 33.8 25.4 23.4 19.06 6.36 10.20 12.70 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

0.75 x 0.50 0.91 x 0.75 1.50 x 1.00 1.75 x 1.08 2.16 x 1.34 5.00 x 4.00 2.81 x 2.48 1.99 x 1.99 1.69 x 1.52 2.37 x 2.03 2.96 x 2.62 3.39 x 2.96 4.06 x 3.56 5.00 x 4.49 6.77 x 6.01 Scalable

2.02 1.32 1.00 0.92 0.74 0.25 0.40 0.52 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

24 dot/mm (600 dpi) printhead

Matrix Font HxW (in dots) Type HxW (in in.) Char./in. HxW (in mm) Char. /mm Character Size

A B C, D E F G H GS P Q R S T U V 0

9X5 11 X 7 18 X 10 42 x 20 26 x 13 60 x 40 34 x 22 24 x 24 20 x 18 28 x 24 35 x 31 40 x 35 48 x 42 59 x 53 80 x 71 Default: 15 x 12

U-L-D U U-L-D OCR-B U-L-D U-L-D OCR-A SYMBOL U-L-D U-L-D U-L-D U-L-D U-L-D U-L-D U-L-D U-L-D

0.015 x 0.010 0.018 x 0.015 0.030 x 0.020 0.137 x 0.087 0.043 x 0.027 0.100 x 0.080 0.100 x 0.093 0.040 x 0.040 0.067 x 0.060 0.093 x 0.080 0.117 x 0.103 0.133 x 0.117 0.160 x 0.140 0.197 x 0.177 0.267 x 0.237 Scalable

100.00 66.66 50.00 11.54 37.5 12.50 10.71 25.00 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

0.38 x 0.25 0.46 x 0.38 0.77 x 0.51 3.47 x 2.20 1.10 x 0.68 2.54 x 2.04 2.54 x 2.37 1.02 x 1.02 1.69 x 1.52 2.37 x 2.03 2.96 x 2.62 3.39 x 2.96 4.06 x 3.56 5.00 x 4.49 6.77 x 6.01 Scalable

4.00 2.60 2.0 0.45 1.50 0.50 0.42 1.00 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

356

Fonts and Bar Codes Bar Codes

Bar Codes
Every bar code contains data made up of a sequence of light spaces and dark bars that represent letters, numbers, or other graphic characters. The usable characters differ among the various kinds of bar codes. Each bar code section in the Command Reference provides a table of applicable characters. Start and stop characters and check digits are used by many, but not all, bar codes. These will be indicated in the specific bar code explanations. Zebra printers can print the following kinds of bar codes: Bar code modulus X dimensions Picket fence (non-rotated) orientation: 203 dpi = 0.0049 in. mil to 0.049 in. 300 dpi = 0.0033 in. mil to 0.033 in. Ladder (rotated) orientation: 203 dpi = 0.0049 in. mil to 0.049 in. 300 dpi = 0.0039 in. mil to 0.039 in. Two-dimensional bar codes Code 49 Maxi Code PDF-417 QR Code Codablock DataMatrix Micro-PDF417 Bar code ratios 2:1 7:3 5:2 3:1 Linear bar codes Code 11 Code 39 Code 93 Code 128 with subsets A/B C and UCC Case Codes ISBT-128 UPC-A UPC-E EAN-8 EAN-13 UPC and EAN 2 or 5 digit extensions Plessey Postnet Standard 2 of 5 Industrial 2 of 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 LOGMARS MSI Codabar RSS-14

Basic Format for Bar Codes

The basic format for bar codes is quiet zone, start character, data, check digit, stop character, and quiet zone. Not all bar codes require each of these elements. Every bar code requires a quiet zone. A quiet zone (sometimes called a clear area) is an area adjacent to the machine-readable symbols that ensure proper reading (decoding) of the symbols. No printing is permissible within this area. Preprinted characters, borders, and background color are acceptable if they are invisible to the reading device; these are used in some applications but restrict the type of reading device that can be used. The size of the quiet zone depends on the size of bar widths (usually 10 times the width of the narrow bar).

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

Fonts and Bar Codes Bar Codes

357

Figure 8 Quiet Zone in a Bar Code

Quiet Zone Quiet Zone

Bar Code Field Instructions

To create a bar code, a bar code field command must be contained in the label format. Table 34 shows the bar code field commands. The number in brackets denotes the print ratio. Each command produces a unique bar code.
Important (*) for Fixed Printing Ratio means that the ratio between the width of the bars in the code is a fixed standard and cannot be changed.

Table 34 Bar Code Field Commands

^B1 ^B2 ^B3 ^B4 ^B7 ^B8 ^B9 ^BA ^BB ^BC ^BD ^BE ^BF ^BI ^BJ ^BK ^BL

Code 11 (USD-8) Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 39 (USD-3 & 3 of 9) Code 49 (*) PDF417 (*) EAN-8 (*) UPC-E Code 93 (USS-93)(*) CODABLOCK A, E, F (*) Code 128 (USD-6) (*) UPS MaxiCode (*) EAN-13 Micro-PDF417 Industrial 2 of 5 Standard 2 of 5 ANSI Codabar (USD-4 & 2 of 7) LOGMARS

[2.0 - 3.0] [2.0 - 3.0] [2.0 - 3.0] [Fixed] [Fixed] [Fixed] [Fixed] [Fixed] [Fixed] [Fixed] [Fixed] [Fixed] [Fixed] [2.0 - 3.0] [2.0 - 3.0] [2.0 - 3.0] [2.0 - 3.0]

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

358

Fonts and Bar Codes Bar Codes

Table 34 Bar Code Field Commands (Continued)

^BM ^BP ^BQ ^BS ^BU ^BX ^BZ

MSI Plessey QR Code (*) UPC/EAN Extensions (*) UPC-A (*) Data Matrix (*) PostNet (*)

[2.0 - 3.0] [2.0 - 3.0] [Fixed] [Fixed] [Fixed] [Fixed] [Fixed]

Additionally, each bar code field command can be issued with a definition parameter string. The parameter string defines field rotation, height, and interpretation line status for all bar codes. For some bar codes, the parameter string also sets a check digit, start character, and/or stop character. Use the definition parameter string to command the printer to print bar codes of appropriate heights and densities that conform to the specifications of the application. The use of the parameter string is optional because all parameters have default values. If the default values for all of the bar code parameters suit the application, then only the bar code command needs to be entered. Parameters in bar code field commands are position specific. If a value (other than the default value) is manually entered for one parameter, a comma , the ZPL II delimiter character, must be used to mark the position of the preceding parameters in the string. To change just the third parameter, enter two commas and then the value for the third parameter. The default values will be automatically used for the first and second parameters. In the ZPL II Programming Guide Volume Two, see the Saving Label Formats as Graphic Images topic in the Programming Exercises chapter, the ^B3 bar code field command has five parameters. The third parameter defines the height of the bar in dots. The bar code is to be printed using default values for the first two parameters EXCEPT the height of the bar. This is to be 20 dots. Finally, the N indicates that a print interpretation line will not print with the bar code. The command would be entered as follows: ^B3,,20,N Delimiters (commas) are not required for parameters between a manually entered value and the end of the parameter string.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

Fonts and Bar Codes Bar Codes

359

Bar Code Command Groups

Bar code commands are organized into four groups. Each group represents a type of bar code. Table 35 through Table 38 identify the groups and the bar codes they contain: Table 35 Numeric Only Bar Codes

^B1 ^B2 ^BI ^BJ ^BK ^BM ^BP ^BZ

Code 11 Interleaved 2 of 5 Industrial 2 of 5 Standard 2 of 5 ANSI Codabar (or NW-7) MSI Plessey POSTNET

Table 36 Retail Labeling Bar Codes

^B8 ^B9 ^BE ^BS ^BU

EAN-8 UPC-E EAM-13 UPC/EAN extensions UPC-A

Table 37 Alphanumeric Bar Code

^B3 ^BA ^BC ^BL

Code 39 Code 93 Code 128 LOGMARS

Table 38 Two-Dimensional Bar Codes

^B4 ^B7 ^BB ^BD

Code 49 PDF417 CODABLOCK UPS MaxiCode MicroPDF417 QR Code Data Matrix

^BF ^BQ ^BX

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

360

Fonts and Bar Codes Bar Codes

Notes ___________________________________________________________________

__

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

D
Mod 10 and Mod 43 Check Digits

This section provides information about Mod 10 and Mod 43 check digits.

Contents
Mod 10 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Mod 43 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

362

Mod 10 and Mod 43 Check Digits Mod 10 Check Digit

Mod 10 Check Digit

The calculations for determining the Mod 10 Check Digit character are as follows:
1. Start at the first position and add the value of every other position together.

0 + 2 + 4 + 6 + 8 + 0 = 20
2. The result of Step 1 is multiplied by 3.

20 x 3 = 60
3. Start at the second position and add the value of every other position together.

1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + 9 = 25
4. The results of steps 1 and 3 are added together.

60 + 25 = 85
5. The check character (12th character) is the smallest number which, when added to the

result in step 4, produces a multiple of 10. 85 + X = 90 (next higher multiple of 10) X = 5 Check Character This bar code illustrates the above example. The digit on the right (5) is the check digit.

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

Mod 10 and Mod 43 Check Digits Mod 43 Check Digit

363

Mod 43 Check Digit

The calculations for determining the Mod 43 check Digit character are as follows: Each character in the Code 39 character set has a specific value, as follows:
0=0 1=1 2=2 3=3 4=4 5=5 6=6 7=7 8=8 9=9 A=10 B=11 C=12 D=13 E=14 F=15 G=16 H=17 I=18 J=19 K=20 L=21 M=22 N=23 O=24 P=25 Q=26 R=27 S=28 T=29 U=30 V=31 W=32 X=33 Y=34 Z=35 - =36 . = 37 Space=38 $=39 /=40 +=41 %=42

Example Data string 2345ABCDE/

1. Add the sum of all the character values in the data string. Using the chart above, the sum

of the character values is as follows: 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 10 + 11 + 12 + 13 + 14 + 40 =115

2. Divide the total by 43. Keep track of the remainder.

115/43 = 2 Remainder is 29
3. The check digit is the character that corresponds to the value of the remainder.

Remainder = 29 29 is the value for the letter T. T is the check digit. Below is a bar code that illustrates the example. The character on the right, T, is the check digit.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

364

Mod 10 and Mod 43 Check Digits Mod 43 Check Digit

Notes ___________________________________________________________________

__

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

E
ZB64 Encoding and Compression

This section describes the Base 64 MIME (ZB64) encoding and compression. This is the same type of MIME encoding that is used in e-mail.

Contents
Introduction to B64 and Z64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 B64 and Z64 Encoding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

366

ZB64 Encoding and Compression Introduction to B64 and Z64

Introduction to B64 and Z64

The first encoding, known as B64, encodes the data using the MIME Base64 scheme. Base64 is used to encode e-mail attachments and is specifically designed to address communications path limitations, such as control characters and 7-bit data links. It encodes the data using only the printable ASCII characters:

With the use of ZPL, this has the added benefit of avoiding the caret (^) and tilde (~) characters. Base64 encodes six bits to the byte, for an expansion of 33 percent over the unenclosed data. This is much better than the 100 percent expansion given by the existing ASCII hexadecimal encoding. The second encoding, known as Z64, first compresses the data using the LZ77 algorithm to reduce its size. (This algorithm is used by the PKWARE compression program PKZIP and is integral to the PNG graphics format.) The compressed data is then encoded using the MIME Base64 scheme as described above. A CRC is calculated across the Base64-encoded data. If the CRC-check fails or the download is aborted, the object can be invalidated by the printer. The robust encodings can be piggybacked on the existing download commands with full backward compatibility. This is done by prefacing the new encodings with a header that uniquely identifies them. The download routines in the printer firmware can key-off the header to determine whether the data is in the old ASCII hexadecimal encoding or one of the new encodings. This allows existing downloadable objects to be used in their present format, while new objects can be created using the same download commands with the new encodings for increased integrity and reduced download times. For easy reference, B64 and Z64 are referred to as ZB64. In any reference to the ZB64 encoding, assume that both Base64-only (B64) and LZ77/Base64 (Z64) encodings are accepted.
Example The following is an example of an existing download command using the new

encoding: ~DTARIAL,59494,:Z64:H4sICMB8+DMAC0FSSUFMLlRURgDsmnd8VEW7x5+ZO edsyibZNNJhlyWhbEJIwYSwJDGNkmwghJIgJYEEEhQIPSggKAjEAiIiVaSoIJ YNBAkIGgGxUBVUUCGU0JQSC0WFnPvbE+SF18+9H+8f973X+3Jm93umzzNznvn NSSFGRJ6ARAVZvXK7XDaXLyTiR5B7ontuZPQ824I5RKIa6ew+aba8+pU1rVDZ iciv [multiple lines deleted] /O6DU5wZ7ie2+g4xzDPwCpwm3nqW2GAPcdclxF4fIP66jHjncmKvKzh/ZUNCx l9/QQx2HXHYB4m/PkQcdCdx2G7OYt+mszkMh4iZxoifvkh89BFipo87kwD/Bf /dOcycAAEA:a1b2

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

ZB64 Encoding and Compression Introduction to B64 and Z64

367

The parameters are identical to the existing ~DT command: Table 39 ~DT Command Parameters
Parameter Details

o = font name

Accepted Values: any valid TrueType name, up to 8 characters Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used In this example, Arial is the specified font. Accepted Values: the number of memory bytes required to hold the Zebra-downloadable format of the font Default Value: if an incorrect value or no value is entered, the command is ignored In this example, 59494 is the size. To maintain compatibility with the existing ASCII hexadecimal encoding, this field must contain the size of the un-enclosed and uncompressed object the number of bytes that are finally placed into the printers memory, not the number of bytes downloaded. Accepted Values: a string of ASCII hexadecimal values (two hexadecimal digits/byte). The total number of two-digit values must match parameter s. Default Value: if no data is entered, the command is ignored Everything following the size field is data. The new encoding imposes a header with a unique signature. The new encoding must start with the characters :B64: (data encoded in Base-64 only) or :Z64: (data compressed with LZ77, then encoded in Base-64) followed by the encoded data. After the data is presented, another colon (:) and four hexadecimal digits comprise the CRC. The Base64 standard allows new-line characters (carriage returns and line feeds) to be inserted into the encoded data for clarity. These characters are ignored by the printer.

s = font size

data = data string

When downloading graphics, the colon is used in the current ASCII hexadecimal encoding indicate repeat the previous dot row. Since this shorthand is invalid for the first character of data (no previous dot row has been downloaded), it is safe for the printer to detect the leading colon character as the lead-in for the new encodings.

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

368

ZB64 Encoding and Compression B64 and Z64 Encoding

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

372

Field Interactions Normal Orientation

Normal Orientation
Table 41 shows you the various normal orientation outputs: Table 41 Normal Orientation Examples
^FPH ^FPV ^FPR

^FO Left Justified

^FT Left Justified

^FO Right Justified

^FT Right Justified

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

Field Interactions Rotated Orientation

373

Rotated Orientation
Table 42 shows you the various rotated orientation outputs: Table 42 Rotated Orientation Examples
^FPH ^FPV ^FPR

^FO Left Justified

^FT Left Justified

^FO Right Justified

^FT Right Justified

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

374

Field Interactions Bottom Up Orientation

Bottom Up Orientation
Table 43 shows you the various bottom up orientation outputs: Table 43 Bottom Orientation Examples
^FPH ^FPV ^FPR

^FO Left Justified

^FT Left Justified

^FO Right Justified

^FT Right Justified

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

Field Interactions Inverted Orientation

375

Inverted Orientation
Table 44 shows you the various inverted orientation outputs: Table 44 Inverted Orientation Examples
^FPH ^FPV ^FPR

^FO Left Justified

^FT Left Justified

^FO Right Justified

^FT Right Justified

6/9/06

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

376

Field Interactions Inverted Orientation

Notes ___________________________________________________________________

__

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

Index

381

read RFID tag read or write RFID format (^RF), 296 read RFID tag (^RT), 311 read/write position set using ZPL, 307 real time clock set language, 256 set mode, 256 real time clock date format select, 212 real time clock time format select, 212 recall format, 280 recall graphic, 281 reprint after error, 210 applicator, 246 reset power on, 202 reset advanced counter, 249 reset advanced counters (~RO), 302 reset optional memory, 189 reset wireless card, 336 return data to host computer (^HV), 174 RFID calibrate RFID tag using ZPL (^HR), 287 change read power using ZPL, 314 change write power using ZPL, 314 detect multiple tags (^RN), 301 enable motion (^RM), 300 number of retries for block (^RR), 304 RFID setup command (^RS), 305 verify write operation (^WV), 320 RFID tag ID command (^RI), 298 ribbon ordering, xix ribbon tension set, 208

set auxiliary port, 195 set battery condition, 193 set darkness, 251 set dots millimeter, 198 set dots per millimeter, 198 set label length, 197 set RFID tag password (^RZ), 315 set serial communications, 250 set units of measurements, 230 set up RFID information (^RS), 305 SGTIN-64 standard programming example, 294 single signal mode setting, 308 slew home position, 239 slew given number dot rows, 238 slew to home position, 239 SMTP parameters setting via ZPL, 326 SNMP parameters setting via ZPL, 323 specify number of retries for block (^RR), 304 standard printer fonts, 350 start print, 261 symbol, 162, 166

T
tag type specify using ZPL, 305 tear-off adjust position, 272 technical support, xix tilde change, 118 time for real time clock set, 268 timeout value for printer home page, 327 transfer object, 273 transmit rate setting via ZPL, 335 transponders calibration using ZPL (^HR), 287 true type font download, 132

S
sales, xix scalable font, 12, 350 download Intellifont, 131 select encoding, 252 sensor calibration graphing, 194 serial communications set, 250 serialization data, 258 serialization field standard ^FD string, 253 set all network printers transparent, 235
6/9/06

U
unbounded true type font download, 133 units of measurement set, 230 UPC/EAN extensions, 92

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

45541L-003 Rev. A

382

Index

UPC-A, 97 UPC-E, 37 update configuration, 207 upload graphics, 177 UPS maxicode, 60 considerations for ^FD, 61 use font name to call font, 14

Z
Zebra Programming Language (ZPL II) ^HR, Calibrate RFID Transponder, 287 ^RA, Read AFI Byte, 290 ^RB, Define EPC Data Structure, 292 ^RE, Enable/Disable E.A.S. Bit, 295 ^RF, Read or Write RFID Format, 296 ^RI, Get RFID Tag ID, 298 ^RM, Enable RFID Motion, 300 ^RN, Detect Multiple RFID Tags, 301 ^RR, Specify RFID Retries for a Block, 304 ^RS, RFID Setup, 305 ^RT, Read RFID Tag, 311 ^RW, Set RFID Read and Write Power, 314 ^RZ, Set RFID Tag Password, 315 ^WF, Write AFI Byte, 316 ^WT, Write Tag, 318 ^WV, Verify RFID Write Operation, 320 ~RO, Reset Advanced Counters, 302 ZebraNet Alert halt, 263 set, 269 ZPL set, 271 ZPL commands ^B7, 31 Wireless Print Server commands, 339, 371

V
verify RFID write operation (^WV), 320 void handling, 307

W
web authentication timeout value, 327 width print, 248 wired print server ^NB to set check for, 322 change network settings, 325 wireless card reset via ZPL, 336 setting values via ZPL, 337 wireless password setting via ZPL, 334 Wireless Print Server ZPL commands, 339, 371 wireless print server change network settings, 331 write AFI byte command (^WF), 316 write power change using ZPL, 314 write RFID format (^RF), 296 write RFID tag (^WT), 318

45541L-003 Rev. A

ZPL II Programming Guide For x.10 through x.13 Firmware

6/9/06

Zebra Technologies Corporation 333 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills, Illinois 60061.3109 U.S.A. Telephone: +1 847.793.2600 Facsimile: +1 847.913.8766 Zebra Technologies Europe Limited Zebra House The Valley Centre, Gordon Road High Wycombe Buckinghamshire HP13 6EQ, UK Telephone: +44 (0) 1494 472872 Facsimile: +44 (0) 1494 450103 Zebra Technologies Asia Pacific, LLC 16 New Industrial Road #05-03 Hudson TechnoCentre Singapore 536204 Telephone: +65 6858 0722 Facsimile: +65 6885 0838

Part Number: 45541L-003 Rev. A 2006 ZIH Corp.

Intrusion Detection Honeypots
From Everand
Intrusion Detection Honeypots
Chris Sanders
3/5 (2)
THE LTSPICE XVII SIMULATOR: Commands and Applications
From Everand
THE LTSPICE XVII SIMULATOR: Commands and Applications
Gilles Brocard
5/5 (1)
Escalator Installation Manual
No ratings yet
Escalator Installation Manual
46 pages
31 & 61-Point Relaxation
100% (3)
31 & 61-Point Relaxation
9 pages
Chemical-Oil Tanker "British Ensign" - IMO 9312913 - Cargo System Operating Manual
100% (1)
Chemical-Oil Tanker "British Ensign" - IMO 9312913 - Cargo System Operating Manual
184 pages
Manual ZPL II
No ratings yet
Manual ZPL II
352 pages
EPL2 Prog
No ratings yet
EPL2 Prog
876 pages
Programming FPGAs: Getting Started with Verilog
From Everand
Programming FPGAs: Getting Started with Verilog
Simon Monk
3.5/5 (2)
Fritzing for Inventors: Take Your Electronics Project from Prototype to Product
From Everand
Fritzing for Inventors: Take Your Electronics Project from Prototype to Product
Simon Monk
No ratings yet
Complete Audio Mastering: Practical Techniques
From Everand
Complete Audio Mastering: Practical Techniques
Gebre E. Waddell
5/5 (5)
Swimming Class Proposal
100% (9)
Swimming Class Proposal
2 pages
Typescript Tutorial
100% (5)
Typescript Tutorial
189 pages
Zebra ZPL Programming Language
No ratings yet
Zebra ZPL Programming Language
412 pages
ZPL II Programming x.14 and Up
100% (1)
ZPL II Programming x.14 and Up
428 pages
Manual ZPL II
No ratings yet
Manual ZPL II
994 pages
Zebra ZPL Language
No ratings yet
Zebra ZPL Language
1,112 pages
ZPL Code Programming
No ratings yet
ZPL Code Programming
1,112 pages
ZPL PG
No ratings yet
ZPL PG
1,112 pages
Zebra ZPL Programming Guide
No ratings yet
Zebra ZPL Programming Guide
1,268 pages
ZPL Manual
No ratings yet
ZPL Manual
1,404 pages
ZPL Manual ZEBRA
No ratings yet
ZPL Manual ZEBRA
1,372 pages
ZPL II Vol1
No ratings yet
ZPL II Vol1
352 pages
Gray Hat Hacking the Ethical Hacker's
From Everand
Gray Hat Hacking the Ethical Hacker's
Çağatay Şanlı
5/5 (1)
ZPL Zbi2 PM en PDF
No ratings yet
ZPL Zbi2 PM en PDF
1,468 pages
User Guide: Industrial/Commercial Printer
No ratings yet
User Guide: Industrial/Commercial Printer
140 pages
ZPL Vol2 Unlocked
No ratings yet
ZPL Vol2 Unlocked
164 pages
Epl PG en
No ratings yet
Epl PG en
876 pages
CNC Machining Handbook: Building, Programming, and Implementation
From Everand
CNC Machining Handbook: Building, Programming, and Implementation
Alan Overby
No ratings yet
Zebra ZPL-II Manual
No ratings yet
Zebra ZPL-II Manual
396 pages
Teardowns: Learn How Electronics Work by Taking Them Apart
From Everand
Teardowns: Learn How Electronics Work by Taking Them Apart
Bryan Bergeron
No ratings yet
Zebra Programming Guide
No ratings yet
Zebra Programming Guide
331 pages
Smart Card Applications: Design models for using and programming smart cards
From Everand
Smart Card Applications: Design models for using and programming smart cards
Wolfgang Rankl
No ratings yet
Manual de Instruções ZEBRA ZM400
No ratings yet
Manual de Instruções ZEBRA ZM400
147 pages
45542l-002 Ra ZPL II Vol2
No ratings yet
45542l-002 Ra ZPL II Vol2
132 pages
Intermec IPL
100% (1)
Intermec IPL
116 pages
Codigo ZPL Xml-Enabled-Qrg-En
No ratings yet
Codigo ZPL Xml-Enabled-Qrg-En
62 pages
Manual Zebra Zm400
No ratings yet
Manual Zebra Zm400
147 pages
Intermec Printer Language IPL Developers Guide Old PDF
No ratings yet
Intermec Printer Language IPL Developers Guide Old PDF
112 pages
Xiiiiplus
No ratings yet
Xiiiiplus
230 pages
Programming the Intel Galileo: Getting Started with the Arduino -Compatible Development Board
From Everand
Programming the Intel Galileo: Getting Started with the Arduino -Compatible Development Board
Christopher Rush
5/5 (1)
HDP5000, HDP5600, HDPii Plus User Guide - l000950 - Rev - 4.1 - hdp5000 - hdp5600 - Hdpii - Plus - User - Guide - en
No ratings yet
HDP5000, HDP5600, HDPii Plus User Guide - l000950 - Rev - 4.1 - hdp5000 - hdp5600 - Hdpii - Plus - User - Guide - en
108 pages
ChatGPT for Business: Strategies for Success
From Everand
ChatGPT for Business: Strategies for Success
Matthew C. Smith
1/5 (1)
Securing ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language Models
From Everand
Securing ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language Models
Matthew C. Smith
No ratings yet
Programming the Photon: Getting Started with the Internet of Things
From Everand
Programming the Photon: Getting Started with the Internet of Things
Christopher Rush
5/5 (1)
Tips & Traps for Building Decks, Patios, and Porches
From Everand
Tips & Traps for Building Decks, Patios, and Porches
R. Dodge Woodson
No ratings yet
B_PRINTING_GUIDE_english
No ratings yet
B_PRINTING_GUIDE_english
68 pages
Zebra ZM400-ZM600 Maint Man
No ratings yet
Zebra ZM400-ZM600 Maint Man
470 pages
Zm400 Zm600 Maintenance Manual
No ratings yet
Zm400 Zm600 Maintenance Manual
117 pages
Powerboater's Guide to Electrical Systems, Second Edition
From Everand
Powerboater's Guide to Electrical Systems, Second Edition
Edwin R. Sherman
5/5 (1)
Manual Zebra
No ratings yet
Manual Zebra
132 pages
LX 4061 T640 642 644 Manual
No ratings yet
LX 4061 T640 642 644 Manual
422 pages
Postscriptbarcode Manual
No ratings yet
Postscriptbarcode Manual
101 pages
Lexmark T630, Lexmark T632, Lexmark T634 Service Manual
No ratings yet
Lexmark T630, Lexmark T632, Lexmark T634 Service Manual
345 pages
l000950 Rev 4.0 Hdp5000 Hdp5600 Hdpii Plus Hdpii 600 User Guide en
No ratings yet
l000950 Rev 4.0 Hdp5000 Hdp5600 Hdpii Plus Hdpii 600 User Guide en
108 pages
Programming Arduino Next Steps: Going Further with Sketches, Second Edition
From Everand
Programming Arduino Next Steps: Going Further with Sketches, Second Edition
Simon Monk
3/5 (3)
Cadence Design With RTL Compiler Physical PDF
No ratings yet
Cadence Design With RTL Compiler Physical PDF
108 pages
Aerospace and Defense Solution Guide
No ratings yet
Aerospace and Defense Solution Guide
282 pages
Presentations with LaTeX: Which package, which command, which syntax?
From Everand
Presentations with LaTeX: Which package, which command, which syntax?
Herbert Voß
No ratings yet
LexmarkT T63x 4060-XXX Factory Repair Service Manual T630 T632 T634
No ratings yet
LexmarkT T63x 4060-XXX Factory Repair Service Manual T630 T632 T634
345 pages
NEC® 2008 Need to Know
From Everand
NEC® 2008 Need to Know
Kimberley Keller
No ratings yet
Electronics from the Ground Up: Learn by Hacking, Designing, and Inventing
From Everand
Electronics from the Ground Up: Learn by Hacking, Designing, and Inventing
Ronald Quan
3.5/5 (2)
You Can Program in C++: A Programmer's Introduction
From Everand
You Can Program in C++: A Programmer's Introduction
Francis Glassborow
No ratings yet
Benefits of semantic data models. A study in the European goods transport industry
From Everand
Benefits of semantic data models. A study in the European goods transport industry
Andreas A. Pelekies
No ratings yet
Software Patterns Made Easy
From Everand
Software Patterns Made Easy
Justice Nanhou
No ratings yet
Programming Arduino: Getting Started with Sketches, Third Edition
From Everand
Programming Arduino: Getting Started with Sketches, Third Edition
Simon Monk
No ratings yet
X-12 Ins. Page (Paper-II) .p65
No ratings yet
X-12 Ins. Page (Paper-II) .p65
8 pages
32 Bit Floating Point ALU
80% (5)
32 Bit Floating Point ALU
7 pages
Guidance Services
No ratings yet
Guidance Services
64 pages
Goals & Objectives Setting - 2012-13 Frequently Asked Questions
No ratings yet
Goals & Objectives Setting - 2012-13 Frequently Asked Questions
3 pages
RCCG Festival of Life - Berlin
No ratings yet
RCCG Festival of Life - Berlin
12 pages
Manual TX-nr535 Adv en
No ratings yet
Manual TX-nr535 Adv en
76 pages
Bain Report The Visionary Ceos Guide To Sustainability
No ratings yet
Bain Report The Visionary Ceos Guide To Sustainability
100 pages
DRAFT-Course&Symposium Dan Full Paper Presentation 28 Juli 2015
No ratings yet
DRAFT-Course&Symposium Dan Full Paper Presentation 28 Juli 2015
252 pages
Cauliflowers Accompaniment
No ratings yet
Cauliflowers Accompaniment
2 pages
2025_W5_Syntax_students
No ratings yet
2025_W5_Syntax_students
33 pages
2.1 Dement and Kleitman 2
No ratings yet
2.1 Dement and Kleitman 2
51 pages
Ipsas 23 - Revenue From Non Exchange Transaction 2
No ratings yet
Ipsas 23 - Revenue From Non Exchange Transaction 2
36 pages
PPG 1st Review
No ratings yet
PPG 1st Review
16 pages
A Financial Analysis of IDBI Bank
No ratings yet
A Financial Analysis of IDBI Bank
5 pages
zain-ksa-page-4
No ratings yet
zain-ksa-page-4
1 page
Prof. Vinod S. Ramteke: Assistant Professor Department of Computer Science Janata Mahavidyalara, Chandrapur (M.S.)
No ratings yet
Prof. Vinod S. Ramteke: Assistant Professor Department of Computer Science Janata Mahavidyalara, Chandrapur (M.S.)
9 pages
The Temple - Powerpoint
No ratings yet
The Temple - Powerpoint
42 pages
HOPE 4 Module 3.1
No ratings yet
HOPE 4 Module 3.1
29 pages
PDF Format Notulensi Kegiatan - Compress
No ratings yet
PDF Format Notulensi Kegiatan - Compress
2 pages
Eva in Her Cat
No ratings yet
Eva in Her Cat
1 page
s6 Aceiteka 2023maths P2
No ratings yet
s6 Aceiteka 2023maths P2
4 pages
Geoff Zeiss
No ratings yet
Geoff Zeiss
47 pages
P10-Transformation of Random Variables
No ratings yet
P10-Transformation of Random Variables
4 pages
Lan Jorhat Ec 08-05-2021
No ratings yet
Lan Jorhat Ec 08-05-2021
13 pages
Mitutoyo Catalog 2013 2014
No ratings yet
Mitutoyo Catalog 2013 2014
676 pages